JP5725072B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various entertainment images such as variation effects (dynamic display of identification information) are displayed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device and the like. Patent Document 1). The fluctuating effect is an effect that starts when a ball enters the starting entrance (start winning prize). For example, the effective display area has three horizontally or vertically, or 3 × 3 cells. A total of nine symbols, etc. are displayed, the symbols displayed based on the predetermined game conditions are scrolled, and when the scrolling stops, the stop symbols become a predetermined combination at a predetermined stop position. It is a thing that generates a jackpot when there is. While such an effect is being performed, background music (Back Ground Music: BGM) is output from the gaming machine, further enhancing the interest of the game.

JP 2001-046635 A

  However, in conventional gaming machines, the background music is simply being played from the speaker, and for the player, the background music is less likely to be interesting, which has helped to improve the fun of the game. There was no circumstance.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game by using music output at least during a game. It is aimed.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is characterized in that a determination unit that makes a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a dynamic display of identification information on the display unit based on a determination result by the determination unit. And a dynamic display executing means for executing the game, and when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined game value is given to the player An output means for outputting music at least during a game played by the player, and a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event triggered by the occurrence of the event caused by the progress of the game Sound generation means for generating a sound, and the sound generation means specifies a chord of the music at the timing of the sound generation, and a chord specified by the chord specification means. Based on provided with a pitch determining means for determining a tone pitch of the alarm sound to the sound, a.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the pitch determining means configures the pitch of the notification sound to be generated to constitute the code specified by the code specifying means. Decide from within.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the determination unit makes a determination in response to establishment of a predetermined start condition, and based on the determination result, the dynamic display of the identification information is performed on the display unit. Executed by means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player, thereby giving the player interest. Also, music is output by the output means at least during a period in which a game is being played by the player. On the other hand, triggered by the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game, a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event is generated by the sound generation means. At this time, the chord of the music at the timing when the notification sound is generated is specified by the code specifying means, and the pitch of the notification sound to be generated is determined by the pitch determining means based on the specified code. As a result, the notification sound is not only pronounced according to the rhythm of the music, but is also pronounced at a pitch that matches the chord progression of the music. Therefore, a melody that matches the music is played by the notification sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest for the game can be enhanced.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. In other words, since the pitch of the notification sound to be generated is determined by the pitch determination means from the constituent sounds constituting the chord specified by the chord specifying means, the notification sound is formed as a chord and a chord of music. It is pronounced with a pitch. Therefore, a pleasant melody that composes music and chords can be played with the notification sound, and the player can be entertained.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the 1st accessory, (b) is the figure which showed schematic structure of the origin detection sensor. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a jackpot random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a jackpot type table, and (c) is a schematic diagram of a variation pattern table for jackpots. (D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a deviation (normal) variation pattern table, and (e) is a diagram schematically showing a variation (probability) variation pattern table. It is the shown schematic diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the various data stored in RAM in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a timing chart which showed the example of the operation timing of the 1st character. As an example of a variation effect, it is a timing chart showing an effect execution timing when the detailed variation pattern is a pseudo-continuous. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table for a fluctuation | variation. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the additional data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of sound edit and output process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of sound edit and output process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of start winning sound output process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of start winning sound output process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the figure which showed the sounding timing of the incoming sound in case one sphere enters into the 1st entrance in one beat of BGM. (A) is the figure which showed the sounding timing of the incoming sound when three spheres enter into the 1st entrance during one beat of BGM, and (b) is one with BGM. Entry sound when two spheres enter the first entrance during the beat and one more sphere enters the first entrance before the next back beat (C) is a diagram illustrating the timing of sound generation, and (c) shows that one ball enters the first entrance during one beat of the BGM and further until the next back beat of one beat. It is a figure explaining the sounding timing of the incoming sound when two spheres enter the first entrance. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the reservation ball number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the confirmation command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. Yes, (c) is a flowchart showing a demo command process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the change start command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the change pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the stop type command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed a part of sound edit and output process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of start winning sound output process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the various data stored in RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table for a fluctuation | variation. It is the flowchart which showed the change pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the detailed variation pattern setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of sound edit and output process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of sound edit and output process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of start winning sound output process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of start winning sound output process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of display setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed a part of start winning sound output process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed a part of start winning sound output process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 43, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and is associated with entering a first entrance 64 (start-start prize) to be described later. Various effects, such as fluctuating effects and reach effects, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. For example, a “town stage” with a town motif, a “sea stage” with a sea motif, a “mountain stage” with a mountain motif, etc. are prepared as stages. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the changing effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation.

  In addition, when the normal reach production is started in the third symbol display device 81, when the normal reach is developed to the super reach, the selection screen of the super reach production mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the normal reach. It is configured as follows. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. For example, on the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electrical decoration portions 29 to 33 that incorporate light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  A small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). ) Can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information.

  The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

  As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, A ball entrance (starting port) 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and a peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by a main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display a change by indicating whether or not the change is made in accordance with the entry to the first entry port 64 (start winning prize) by a lighting state, or a stop pattern after the end of the change. As for the ball (reserved ball) that has not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, the symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the start prize is indicated by the lighting state. The number of reserved balls, which is a number, is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64, whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined, and if the jackpot is determined, the type of the jackpot is also determined. . As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, and short-time jackpot are prepared. The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “2R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of two rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Also, “time-saving big hit” is a big hit that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds is a big hit of 15 rounds and is in a short-time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. In the high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment, the winning probability of a second symbol (ordinary symbol) described later is increased, and an electric accessory (not shown) associated with the first entrance 64 is opened. By becoming easy, it includes a game state in which a ball can easily enter the first entrance 64.

  On the other hand, the “low probability state” means a time when the probability change is not in progress and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the probability of jackpot is lower than that at the time of probability change. Also, the short-time state (mid-time) in the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is increased, It means a game state in which a ball can easily enter the first entrance 64 due to the fact that the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is easily opened.

  In addition, instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time when the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released, or one hit in the second symbol It is good also as what changes the frequency | count of opening an electrically-driven accessory. For example, the short time state or the high probability state in the low probability state may be a state in which the opening time of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is longer than in other game states. Moreover, the short time state and the high probability state in the low probability state may be a state in which the number of times that the electric accessory is released per hit in the second symbol is larger than in other game states.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a liquid crystal display that displays the variation of the third symbol while being synchronized with the variation display on the first symbol display device 37, triggered by a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). (Hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”), and a LED that variably displays the second symbol (ordinary symbol) triggered by the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. The second symbol display device 83 is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a first accessory 87 that is a movable accessory for a notice effect.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch large liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIGS. 6 and 12) to be described later, for example, left, middle And the three symbol rows on the right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. The decorative display according to is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is a big win, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned. In other words, the jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. When shifting to a high-probability state (probability variation state) after the big hit, the variable display in which the main symbols (“high-probability symbol” and “probability variation symbol”) to which odd numbers are added is arranged is performed. On the other hand, when shifting to the low probability state after the big hit, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols (“low probability symbol” and “normal symbol”) to which even numbers are added are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm for variably displaying the third symbol, and the others. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. For example, a notice effect is performed.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, one variation display is provided as an aspect of the variation effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 in association with the entry to the first entry port 64 (start winning prize). Among them, a so-called “pseudo sequence” in which the pseudo variation of the third symbol is continuously performed a plurality of times can be performed. The “pseudo-ream” is a kind of notice effect that suggests a degree of expectation that will be a big hit as a result of the variable display in which the pseudo-ream is executed. Fluctuation effects are performed according to a mode in which “pseudo fluctuation” is repeatedly performed.

  In the “pseudo-continuous”, the larger the number of repetitions of the pseudo stop and re-variation performed during the one variation display (that is, the number of times the pseudo variation is continuously performed), the larger the jackpot is given after the variation display. The number of repetitions is determined so as to increase the expectation. Thus, the more the pseudo variation is repeatedly performed during one variation display, the more the player can feel that the possibility of winning a big hit increases. Therefore, by performing the fluctuating effect by the “pseudo-ream”, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game for the player.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times that the ball enters is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to four times, but three times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80, the game board 13, or the front frame 12 and the like are provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls. May be displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The first accessory 87 is a disk-like movable accessory in a front view of the game area, and is used for a notice effect. The first accessory 87 is at the origin position as an initial position in a normal state, and is stored inside the upper side of the center frame 86 so that the player cannot visually recognize it. And when the notice effect by the 1st accessory 87 is performed, the 1st accessory 87 operate | moves as follows.

  That is, at any timing of the third symbol variation effect performed on the third symbol display device 81, the first accessory 87 descends from the center frame 86 and moves up and down when it reaches a certain position. When the variation effect is a big hit, after the first actor 87 moves up and down, it descends to the maximum descending position (maximum point position) and rotates clockwise in the front view of the gaming area (in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 2). By operating, a notice effect (so-called one-shot notice effect) for notifying that the change effect will be a big hit is performed.

  On the other hand, when the variation effect is out of the range, the first accessory 87 moves up and down, does not descend to the maximum point position, rises, and is stored inside the upper side of the center frame 86 again. Thereby, while the 1st actor 87 moves up and down, the 1st actor 87 can fall to the maximum point position and can make a player expect that it will be a big hit, and raise the interest to a game. Can do. In addition, when the first accessory 87 is lowered to the maximum point position, it is possible to give the player a great joy or superiority for being a big hit.

  An LED (not shown) is built in the vicinity of the rotation center of the first accessory 87, and when the LED is turned on or blinking in conjunction with the rotation operation of the first accessory 87, the notice effect is further increased. To be emphasized. In addition, an image in which the brightness around the first accessory 87 is increased in accordance with the operation of the first accessory 87 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the notice effect by the 1st actor 87 is emphasized more, and a player's joy can be raised further.

  Here, the configuration of the first accessory 87 will be described with reference to FIG. The first accessory 87 employs a rack and opinion system as a configuration for moving the first accessory 87 up and down, and includes a first accessory up-and-down motor 87a, a drive gear 87b and a driven gear as gears. 87c and a slide gear 87d. Although not shown, a first accessory rotating motor 87e (see FIG. 6) for rotating the first accessory 87 is provided. When the first accessory rotating motor 87e is driven, the first accessory 87 rotates in the clockwise direction (in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 2) in the game area.

  The first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is a stepping motor, and drives and rotates the drive gear 87b by a given step unit by applying a pulse signal. The driven gear 87c is meshed with the drive gear 87b and is driven to rotate by the rotational force of the drive gear 87b.

  The first slide gear 87d is formed by cutting a flat bar and meshed with the driven gear 87c. The first slide gear 87d can reciprocate in the vertical direction as the driven gear 87c rotates. . A first accessory 87 is connected to the lower end of the first slide gear 87d.

  Therefore, the drive gear 87a is driven and rotated in units of steps by the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a, so that the slide gear 87d moves in the vertical direction in steps of the driven gear 87c. Accordingly, the first accessory 87 can be moved up and down within the range from the origin position to the maximum point position. In the pachinko machine 10, when the first accessory 87 is at the origin position, the first accessory 87 is driven by driving the first accessory up / down moving motor 87a by 100 steps in the direction in which the first accessory 87 is lowered. Is configured to reach the maximum point position.

  The drive control of the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e is a sound lamp, which will be described later, for controlling sound output, lighting and turning off of the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the like. This is performed by the control device 112.

  A protrusion 87f is provided at the upper end of the slide gear 87d. An origin detection sensor 88 is provided at the position of the protrusion 87f of the slide gear 87d when the first accessory 87 is at the origin position. Further, a maximum point detection sensor 89 is provided at the position of the protrusion 87f of the slide gear 87d when the first accessory 87 is at the maximum point position.

  Here, the configuration of the origin detection sensor 88 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5B is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the origin detection sensor 88. The maximum point detection sensor 89 has the same configuration as that of the origin detection sensor 88, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  The origin detection sensor 88 includes a light emitting element attachment portion 88a to which a light emitting element (not shown) is attached, a light receiving element attachment portion 88b to which a light receiving element (not shown) is attached, and one end of the light emitting element attachment portion 88a. A light emitting element mounting portion 88b is a U-shaped sensor constituted by a connecting portion 88c that connects one end of the light receiving element 88b so that the light emitting element and the light receiving element are opposed to each other by a predetermined distance. The detection groove 88d is formed by the portion 88a, the light receiving element mounting portion 88b, and the connecting portion 88c.

  When there is no insert in the detection groove 88d, the light emitted from the light emitting element attached to the light emitting element attaching portion 88a is received as it is by the light receiving element attached to the light receiving element attaching portion 88b. On the other hand, when an insert is inserted into the detection groove 88d, the light emitted from the light emitting element attached to the light emitting element attaching portion 88a is blocked, and the light receiving element attached to the light receiving element attaching portion 95b receives the light. Can not. The origin detection sensor 88 outputs an off signal when the light receiving element receives light, and outputs an on signal when no light is received, so that in the control device that has received the signal, there is any insert in the detection groove 88d. It can be determined whether or not it has been inserted.

  In the origin detection sensor 88, the light emitting element mounting portion 88a is disposed on the front side in the front view, the light receiving element mounting portion 85b is disposed on the rear surface side in the front view, and the connecting portion 88c is disposed on the left side in the front view. The projection 87f of the slide gear 87d is attached so that the light irradiated from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked by being inserted into the detection groove 88d. Therefore, when the origin detection sensor 88 detects that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked, the origin detection sensor 88 outputs an ON signal, so that the control device can perform the first role. It can be determined that the object 87 has reached the origin position.

  The maximum point detection sensor 89 is arranged in the same direction as the origin detection sensor 88, the first accessory 87 is at the maximum point position, and the projection 87f of the slide gear 87d is inside the detection groove of the maximum point detection sensor 89. By being inserted, it is attached so that light irradiated from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked. Therefore, when the maximum point detection sensor 89 detects that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked, the control device outputs the ON signal from the maximum point detection sensor 89, It can be determined that the single accessory 87 has reached the maximum point position.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 displays a variable display in which a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” are alternately lit as a display symbol (second symbol) every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67. Is what you do. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the first entrance 64 is activated for a predetermined time (opened). Configured). The number of passing balls through the second entrance 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of balls held is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above and also displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the second symbol variation display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the passage of the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the first entrance 64, but is limited to 4 times or less, or 5 times (for example, , 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first entrance (start winning entrance) 64 through which a ball can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by turning on the first entrance switch. The main control device 110 draws a big hit, and the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is started (started). Then, after the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the fluctuation display is stopped, the display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as the third symbol display. The display is stopped on the active line L1 of the device 81. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, and a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and various data temporarily when executing the control program stored in the ROM 202. In addition, the RAM 203 is a memory for storing, and in addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a jackpot variation pattern table 202c, and a release variation pattern table 202d as fixed value data used for controlling these processes. The RAM 203 controls main processes of the pachinko machine 10 (a jackpot lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83, etc.). Various counters are provided for this purpose.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8, various counters provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and various tables 202a to 202d stored in the ROM 202 will be described. First, FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol The stop pattern selection counter C3, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), or at an interval of 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 22). Further, some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 22). The updated value of each counter is appropriately stored in a counter buffer 203b set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The counter buffer 203b is an area for storing the updated value of each counter, and the MPU 201 uses the value stored in the counter buffer 203b at the counter update timing for each counter. Update the counter.

  The RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas). The reserved area indicates the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 read from the counter buffer 203b in accordance with the entrance timing to the first entrance 64. Is an area for temporarily storing (holding). In addition, the execution area stores a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 that are used to determine a variation pattern and stop type of jackpot lottery and variation effects at the start timing of variation. It is an area to do.

  When the MPU 201 detects a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize), each of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 of the counter buffer 203b at that time is detected. The value is stored in one area of the reserved first to fourth areas. At this time, if there is no reservation in the reserved area and all of the reserved first to fourth areas are empty areas, the value of each counter is stored in the reserved first area. When there is only one hold in the hold area and each counter value is stored only in the hold first area, the value of each counter is stored in the hold second area. When there are two holds in the holding area and the values of the counters are stored only in the holding first and second areas, the values of the counters are stored in the holding third area. When there are three holds in the holding area and the values of the counters are stored only in the holding first to third areas, the values of the counters are stored in the holding fourth area.

  Thereby, the value of each counter acquired from the counter buffer 203b at the timing of the start winning prize is stored in the hold first area, the hold second area, the hold third area, and the hold fourth area in the order of the start winning prize. Can do. If a start winning is detected when the value of each counter is stored in all of the holding first to fourth areas, the value of each counter at that time is not held but discarded. That is, in the present embodiment, the value of each counter can be held up to four start winnings.

  Further, when the start timing of the variable effect is reached, the MPU 201 moves each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved first area to the execution area. Based on the value of each counter stored in the execution area, the big hit lottery, the variation pattern of the variation effect and the type of the stop symbol are determined.

  Further, after the values of the counters in the holding first area are moved to the execution area, the values of the counters stored in the holding second area are shifted to the empty holding first area and stored in the holding third area. Each counter value is shifted to the reserved second area, and the counter value stored in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area. Thus, when the fluctuating effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the holding ball storage area 203c, the holding is reduced by one and one area of the holding area is opened.

  Each counter will be described in detail. As described above, the first per-random number counter C1 is a counter for use in the jackpot lottery, and is updated periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this embodiment). The update of the first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899), and reaches the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). This is done by returning to 0 later. Further, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round (when the initial value is periodically updated from a certain initial value and then returned to the initial value in the next update), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time Is set as a new initial value in the first random number counter C1, and updating is performed from the initial value.

  As described above, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used as the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1, and is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first per-random number counter C1. For example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also configured by a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is not only updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) is executed, but is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 22).

  The value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the counter buffer 203b is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Then, at the start of the fluctuation, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c is a random number value (big value random number value, also referred to as a winning value). Make a lottery. The value of the random number for the jackpot (the jackpot random number value) is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the reserved ball storage area 203c (more precisely, the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c) If the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in (1) matches the jackpot random number set by the jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined that the jackpot is won.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a shows the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 (jackpot random number value) determined to be a jackpot. The jackpot random number table 202a includes a jackpot random number value that is referred to when the gaming state is in a low probability state (that is, a period during which the probability change is not performed) and a jackpot random number value that is referred to when the gaming state is in a high probability state (that is, that the probability change is in progress). The number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

  In the present embodiment, the first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. Further, the number of jackpot random numbers that are jackpots in the low probability state is three, and the values “7, 307, 582” are associated with the “low probability state” and stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. . On the other hand, the number of jackpot random numbers that are jackpots in the high probability state is 30, and the values “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ”are associated with the“ high probability state ”in the jackpot random number table 202a. Stored.

  When the MPU 201 makes a jackpot determination, the MPU 201 reads a jackpot random number value suitable for the gaming state at that time from the jackpot random number table 203a. Then, the MPU 201 determines that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 (first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c) used for the jackpot determination is read from the jackpot random number table 203a. It is determined whether or not it matches one of them.

  In other words, when the gaming state is in a low probability state, a big hit occurs when the value of the first per-random number counter C1 matches any one of “7, 307, 582”. Since the first hit random number counter C1 is updated in the range of 0 to 899, the big hit probability in the low probability state is 1/300. If the gaming state is a high probability state, the value of the first random number counter C1 is “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ”is a big hit. Therefore, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/30.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number value read from the jackpot random number table 202a in the low probability state and the jackpot random number value read from the jackpot random number table 202a in the high probability state are not duplicated. A jackpot random value is set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random number value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), by changing the value of the random number that is a big hit, Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraud.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of various counters provided in the RAM 203 will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the big hit type when the big hit is reached, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99). In the case of a counter that can take a value, the counter returns to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), Along with the first per-random number counter C <b> 1, it is stored in any one of the reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the reserved ball storage area 203 c of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203c is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, the variation pattern in the variation effect In addition, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) is the one at the time of detachment. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203c is a random number that is a big hit, the variation pattern and stop type in the variation effect will be those for the big hit. . In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202.

  Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 8B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 are associated with each other.

  As described above, as the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after jackpot of 15 rounds. There is a “15R normal jackpot” that becomes a short-time state during the number of fluctuations, and a “2R probability variable jackpot” in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of two rounds.

  In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with a value of a first jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8B, the value “0-39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variable big hit, and the value “40˜ 79 ”is associated, and the value“ 80 to 99 ”of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation big hit.

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a big hit value, the big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table 202b. . For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “20”, “15R probability variable big hit” is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “60”, the big hit type is “ If “15R normal jackpot” is determined and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90”, “2R probability variation jackpot” is determined as the jackpot type.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the case of jackpot, the 15R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, the 15R normal jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, and the 2R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 20%. . Note that the probability that each jackpot type is selected in the case of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each big hit type is defined in the big hit type table 202b.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 determines a stop symbol type (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) when the stop pattern is lost. For example, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 99, and the maximum value ( That is, after reaching 99), it returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop pattern at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop pattern selection counter C3. As the stop type selected in the present embodiment, after the occurrence of reach, the final stop symbol is the “stop out of front / rear reach” in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. There are three stop (production) patterns: “reach other than front / rear detachment” that stops other than before and after the reach symbol, and “complete disengagement” where no reach occurs.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the RAM 203 It is stored in any one of the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203c. Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203c is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, the stop type in the variable effect Is the one at the time of detachment. In this case, the stop type at that time is determined based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area.

  In the present embodiment, the ROM 202 is provided with a plurality of tables (not shown) corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3 in which the range of random number values to be selected for the stop type is different. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. It becomes easy to select “completely off”. This table has a narrow range of random numbers corresponding to “rear out of front / rear out” and “reach out of front / rear out of front” and “rear out of front / rear out of front” and “reach out of front / rear out of front”. It becomes difficult to select “reach out of reach” or “reach other than out of front / rear”.

  If the probability is low, a table with a narrow range of random values from 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected to secure the time for entering the first entrance 64. This makes it difficult to select “completely off”. In this table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front / rear deviation” is as wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is a loop counter for use in determining a variation pattern. For example, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and reaches 0 to the maximum value (that is, 198). Yes. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every 4 milliseconds in a main process (see FIG. 22) described later, and is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process.

  When starting the change, the MPU 201 refers to the value of the change type counter CS1 of the counter buffer 203b and the change pattern table stored in the ROM 202, and determines the change pattern to be executed in the change effect. The variation pattern determined here is a variation time of symbol variation.

  That is, main controller 110 determines only the variation time of the symbol variation as the variation pattern. A specific variation mode is set by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Based on the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can select the third symbol display device from among the fluctuation modes in which the fluctuation display can be performed with the fluctuation time. The details of the variation pattern of the third symbol displayed at 81 are determined. Then, according to the determined variation mode, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to variably display the third symbol, and the sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the variation display. At the same time, the lamp of the lamp display device 227 (lighting units 29 to 33) is turned on and blinked.

  As described above, the main control device 110 determines only the variation time as the processing for determining the variation pattern, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 provide details of the variation mode according to the variation time. decide. The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer and cannot perform complicated processing. However, when determining the variation pattern, the main controller 110 is configured to determine only the variation time. Compared with the case where the main control device 110 determines the details of the variation mode, the variation pattern determination processing of the main control device 110 can be easily performed.

  Further, when the details of the variation mode are determined by the main control device 110, detailed information on the determined variation mode must be notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the like, and the command necessary for the notification is, for example, 3 There is a risk that it may have to be composed of bytes or more, and command transmission and reception may be complicated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the main controller 110 is configured to determine only the variation time. Therefore, if only the information regarding the determined variation time is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 or the like. In many cases, the configuration of the command related to the notification can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to suppress complication of command transmission / reception. Even if only the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is determined in the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the fluctuation mode according to the specified fluctuation time from among the many fluctuation modes. In addition, since it is configured to perform variable display on the third symbol display device 81 in the determined variation mode, various variation effects can be given to the player, and the player's interest is improved. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, as the variation pattern table used for determining the variation pattern (variation time) according to the value of the variation type counter CS1, the big hit variation pattern table 202c used at the time of big hit and the variation pattern table 202c used at the time of deviation are used. A deviation variation pattern table 202d is prepared. Further, as the deviation variation pattern table 202d, a variation pattern for deviation (probability variation) depending on whether the gaming state is a short-time state or a high-probability state at the time of probability change, or a normal low-probability state excluding the time-short state. A table 202d2 and a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 are prepared.

  Here, with reference to FIG.8 (c)-(e), the detail of various variation patterns is demonstrated. First, FIG. 8C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the big hit variation pattern table 202c stored in the ROM 202. FIG. As shown in FIG. 8C, the jackpot variation pattern table 202c is divided into groups (groups) based on the jackpot type. Specifically, the jackpot type is classified into 15R jackpot common to be referred when the jackpot type is 15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot, and dedicated to 2R probability variation jackpot referred to when it is 2R probability variation jackpot. Then, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each divided group.

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a big hit random number value at the start of fluctuation, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area is set. In response, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 of the counter buffer 203b is determined from the jackpot variation table 202c.

  Common to 15R jackpots are fluctuation patterns of fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and fluctuation C with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds. Associating these fluctuations A to C with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation A is 0 to 10, the fluctuation B is 11 to 99, and the fluctuation C is 100 to 198.

  When the variation A (30 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the variation effect is performed in a normal reach manner under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. When the variation B (60 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the variation effect is performed in a super-reach manner or the variation effect is performed by the pseudo-ream, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Is called. When the variation C (90 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the variation effect is performed in a special reach mode by the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, or the variation effect by the pseudo-ream. Is done.

  Norreach is a reach that has a short variation time, and is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the short reach (so-called bitter stop is aligned). The super reach is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the reach of the variation time longer than the normal reach (for example, the reach developed from the long reach or the normal reach). In addition, the special reach has the 1st pattern (or 3rd pattern) after reaching a longer fluctuation time than the super reach. Fluctuation pattern).

  The 15R jackpot common table is selected in the case of 15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot, so that various special reach types are easily selected in order to give the player a sense of expectation. However, by configuring so that normal reach and super reach are also selected, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit from any reach.

  In addition, the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach executed by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are prepared in large numbers with different production contents even in the same variation time. For example, in addition to the normal reach where no character is displayed, there is a reach where a predetermined character is displayed when two symbols on the active line L1 become the same symbol and reach a reach state, or at other timing. ing. Various characters are displayed in this case. In addition, there are multiple reach types with different contents, such as a reach that changes the back image quickly, a reach that adds a notice effect before the start of change, and a reach that adds a big hit due to re-change. ing. Thereby, various variation effects can be executed and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation B or the variation C is determined as the variation pattern, not only the reach but also the variation effect by the pseudo-ream can be executed by the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. It has become even more interesting for players through the pseudo-ream.

  The variation pattern selected exclusively for the 2R probability variation big hit is only the 2R variation with a variation time of 59 seconds, and the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0-198. That is, when the jackpot type is 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R fluctuation (59 seconds) is determined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  When 2R variation (59 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, one mode is selected from among a plurality of prepared variation modes dedicated to 2R probability variation big hits under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The variation effect is performed in the selected mode. As a variation mode dedicated to 2R probability variation jackpot, for example, with the character of “chicken”, the variation pattern in which the final first symbol (or third symbol) stops at a specific symbol, or “girl” that does not normally appear A variation mode in which the final first symbol (or third symbol) stops at a specific symbol along with the character is included.

  The variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, other variation type counters for finely adjusting the variation time in about ± several seconds may be provided, and whether or not a notice effect for notifying the start of a jackpot or reach effect is added before or during the change effect This may be determined by another variation type counter.

  FIG. 8D is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202 d 1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 8 (d), the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 is used only for complete disconnection, which is referred to when complete disengagement is determined as the stop type at the time of disengagement, front / rear disengagement reach, and front / rear disengagement. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the reach common that is referenced when a reach other than is determined, and the stop type at the time of a break, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups It is attached.

  When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is not a big hit value (big hit random number value) at the start of the fluctuation, that is, when the value is out of the game state, the gaming state is excluded from the short time state When in the normal low probability state, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 of the counter buffer 203b is displayed according to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. It is determined from the deviation (normal) variation pattern.

  For complete deviation only, the variation pattern is a variation D in which the variation is completed in a short time of 7 seconds and the reach is not established, and a variation E in which the variation time is 10 seconds and longer than the variation D, but the reach is not established. The time is as long as 55 seconds, and there is a fluctuation F in which a pseudo fluctuation is performed five times within one fluctuation, and finally the deviation is not established without reaching, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is Are 0 to 98 for variation D (7 seconds), 99 to 148 for variation E (10 seconds), and 149 to 198 for variation F (55 seconds). In addition, the reach common includes the above-described variation A (30 seconds), variation B (60 seconds), and variation C (90 seconds), and the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the variation A. (30 seconds) is 0 to 98, fluctuation B (60 seconds) is 99 to 190, and fluctuation C (90 seconds) is 191 to 198.

  FIG. 8E is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 8E, the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation, similar to the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1. And a reach common reference when a reach other than front / rear out reach and a reach other than front / rear out are determined as stop types at the time of the come-off.

  Then, for each divided group, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the variation pattern selected in each group. Note that the fluctuation F (55 seconds) is not included in the fluctuation pattern that is selected when only complete deviation is referenced, and only the fluctuation D (7 seconds) and the fluctuation E (10 seconds) are selected. In addition, the variation pattern selected when the common reach is referred to is the variation A (30 seconds), the variation B (60 seconds), and the variation C (90 seconds) in the same manner as the out (normal) variation pattern table 202d1. )

  When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a value that does not become a big hit, that is, a value that is out of the game, if the gaming state is in the short-time state or the high probability state at the time of probability change, In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the area, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 of the counter buffer 203b is determined from the deviation (probability change) change pattern table 202d2. Is done.

  In this deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2, the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 dedicated to complete deviation is 0 to 190 for the variation D (7 seconds) and 191 to 198 for the variation E (10 seconds). It has become. Further, associating with the value of the variation type counter CS1 common to the reach, the variation A (30 seconds) is 0 to 98, the variation B is 99 to 190, and the extra special reach is 191 to 198.

  Since the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d2 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is in the short-time state or the high probability state during the probability change, a state in which the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 is described. Become. Therefore, when the fluctuation F having a fluctuation time of 55 seconds is performed in the short-time state or the high probability state, or when the fluctuation E having a relatively long fluctuation time is frequently performed, It may take time until the start of the variable display, giving a waiting state to the player and possibly giving the player a feeling of discomfort. Moreover, even if it is a hall | hole, an operation rate falls and it is not preferable. Therefore, in the case of complete losing, when the gaming state is in the short-time state or the high probability state at the time of probability change, the variation F is not selected, and the variation is more than in the normal state except for the short-time state. By configuring so that the variation D having a variation time shorter than E can be easily selected and starting the next variation display at an early stage, the possibility of giving the player unpleasantness can be reduced. Moreover, it can suppress that an operation rate falls extremely.

  The variation pattern at the time of detachment is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters together (selection of presence / absence of notice display, etc.). In addition, when reach is established at the time of detachment, the number of the first symbol (or the third symbol) that stops last is shifted and stopped (for example, the front and back shifts that are shifted by one symbol). May be determined.

  Further, the selection of the detachment type is configured to be divided into the detachment (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 and the detachment (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2. However, even when the gaming state is normal, there are a plurality of holding balls. In the case of (for example, 3 or more if the maximum is 4), the change display may be terminated early, so that it may be selected with reference to the deviation (probability change) change pattern table 202d2. A variation pattern table for normal use or probability change corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  Further, in the variation pattern tables for each deviation shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, when the variation D and the variation E are simply excluded, and the deviation is selected, refer to the other tables. The variation D and the variation E may be selected with a predetermined probability. Of course, in this case as well, a table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  Returning to FIG. 7 again, various counters will be described. As described above, the second per-random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83. For example, the second random number counter C4 is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 250 and reaches the maximum value (that is, 250). It is configured as a loop counter that returns to zero. In addition, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round (when the initial value is periodically updated and returned to the initial value in the next update), the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time Is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. Get when it is done.

  The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and the symbol “○” is displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed and the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 22).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 displays the jackpot lottery and display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, in addition to the counter buffer 203b for storing various counters and the reserved ball storage area 203c shown in FIG. It has an area and a work area (work area) in which values such as various flags and counters and I / O are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 22), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 21) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 20) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 further has at least a reserved ball number counter 203a. The reserved ball number counter 203a holds the variable display (variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81) held on the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of balls (the number of waiting times) up to four times. The initial value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is set to zero, and 1 is added to a maximum value of 4 each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls for variable display increases. (See S1403 in FIG. 19). On the other hand, the held ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 every time a change display based on a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is executed (see S1205 in FIG. 17).

  The value of the held ball number counter 203a (that is, the number of held balls) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the held ball number command (see S1406 in FIG. 19). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the reserved ball number counter 203a is incremented by 1 after entering the first entrance 64.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the reserved ball number counter 203a is incremented by 1, the value of the variable number of held balls held in the main control device 110 itself. Can be obtained. As a result, the number of held balls for variable display managed by the number of held balls counter 223a of the sound lamp controller 113 deviates from the number of held balls for actual variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if this happens, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of held balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 20) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs light on and off in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, and the like) 227, and a first accessory. The control of the drive of 87, the setting of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, etc. are controlled.

  The sound lamp control device 113 includes an MPU 221 that is an arithmetic device that controls the entire sound lamp control device 113, a sound output LSI 301 that generates sound to be reproduced and outputs the sound generated by driving the sound output device 226. have. The MPU 221 includes a program ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory.

  Here, the details of the RAM 223 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223. The RAM 223 has a reserved ball number counter 223a, a detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b, a time-saving BGM playback flag 223c, a start winning counter 223d, a frame button operation effect flag 223e, a frame button operation frequency counter 223f, a pointer 223g, a timer counter 223h, a progress It has at least a sound generation flag 223j and a pitch information memory 223k.

  The reserved ball number counter 223a is a variation effect (variable display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) in the same manner as the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the control device 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the reserved ball number counter 223a.

  Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the reserved ball number of the changing effect by entering the first entrance 64, and the main controller 110 adds the value of the held ball number counter 203a. When the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, the value after addition of the held ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the main controller 110 holds the Is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223a (see S2007 in FIG. 25).

  In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the held ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110, and the third symbol is received in response to the reception. When the variation display mode on the display device 81 is set, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is subtracted by 1 (see S2107 in FIG. 26). Thus, since the value of the held ball number counter 223a is updated according to the command transmitted from the main controller 110, the value can be updated while synchronizing with the held ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. .

  The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the reserved ball number counter 223a in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, or the reserved ball number counter 223a in response to the reception of the variation pattern command. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the stored ball count counter 223a after the storage or after the update, a display reserved ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display-reserved ball number command, it displays a hold ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see S2951 in FIG. 41). As described above, the value of the held ball number counter 223a is changed in synchronization with the hold counter 403a of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the hold counter 403a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b is a counter for determining the variation mode (detailed variation pattern) of the variation effect to be started based on the variation pattern notified from the main controller 110 by the variation pattern command. The detailed variation pattern determination table 222a (see FIG. 6) provided in FIG. Here, the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a is also described in accordance with the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b.

  In this embodiment, no character is displayed during the variation time of 30 seconds as a detailed variation pattern determined when variation A (variation time 30 seconds) is instructed by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110. In addition to the normal normal reach, a plurality of normal reaches are displayed in which a predetermined character is displayed while changing.

  As a detailed pattern determined when the change B (change time 60 seconds) is instructed, a predetermined character is displayed during a change time of 60 seconds, a rear image is displayed with a fast change, or the like. In addition to a plurality of super-reach systems, a plurality of pseudo-reams are prepared in which pseudo-variation is executed a plurality of times during a 60-second variation time.

  As a detailed pattern determined when the change C (change time of 90 seconds) is instructed, a predetermined character is displayed during the change time of 90 seconds, or the rear image is displayed with a fast change. In addition to a plurality of special reach, a plurality of pseudo-series in which a pseudo variation is executed a plurality of times during a variation time of 90 seconds.

  As a detailed fluctuation pattern determined when 2R fluctuation (fluctuation time of 59 seconds) is instructed, a plurality of fluctuation modes dedicated to 2R probability variation big hits with a fluctuation time of 59 seconds are prepared.

  Further, for each variation pattern (variation A to variation F, 2R variation), different detailed variation patterns are prepared depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a normal state, a time reduction or a certain variation state.

  The detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b and the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a are prepared for the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received from the main controller 110. This is used to determine one detailed variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed for the variation pattern command from among a plurality of detailed variation patterns.

  The detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b is constituted by a loop counter, and the update is periodically performed (in the present embodiment, in the process of S1912 executed every 1 ms in the main process (see FIG. 24)). . The detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b is updated by incrementing one by one within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in the present embodiment) and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (99). In addition, the initial value “0” is set in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the startup process (see FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on.

  In the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a, for each variation pattern (variation A, variation B, variation C, 2R variation) notified from the main controller 110, various details prepared for each variation pattern are provided. The value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b is determined in association with the variation pattern. In addition, the association between the detailed variation pattern and the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b depends on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in which the variation effect is performed (whether it is a normal state, a probability variation state, or a short time state). Furthermore, each pattern of variation (variation A, variation B, variation C, 2R variation) is separately associated with each other depending on whether the symbol that is determined and displayed in the variation effect is “big hit” or “off”.

  When the MPU 221 receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the MPU 221 reads the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b at that time from the RAM 223. When the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a normal state and is determined to be a big hit from the variation type notified by the received stop type command, the gaming state is determined with respect to the variation pattern notified by the received variation pattern command. Is the “normal state” and the stop type is “big hit”, the detailed variation pattern associated with the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b read from the RAM 223 is specified from the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a. . In addition, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a short-time state and is determined to be out of the variation type notified by the received stop type command, the gaming state is determined for the variation pattern notified by the received variation pattern command. Is the “short time state” and the stop type is “out”, the detailed variation pattern associated with the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b read from the RAM 223 is specified from the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a. .

  The MPU 221 controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 based on the determined detailed variation pattern, and also displays the determined detailed variation pattern to the display control device 114 by a display variation pattern command. Notice. The display control device 114 controls the variation display of the third symbol display device 81 based on the detailed variation pattern notified by the display variation pattern command. As a result, the sound output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the third symbol display device 81 perform a variation effect by the determined detailed variation pattern.

  When the fluctuation D (fluctuation time: 7 seconds) is instructed by the fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110, a detailed fluctuation pattern of a mode in which the fluctuation time of 7 seconds completely deviates after elapses is One is prepared for each gaming state. When the variation E (variation time 10 seconds) is instructed, one variation pattern is prepared for each gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 as the details of the mode in which the variation time of 10 seconds is completely out of order. Further, when the variation F (variation time 55 seconds) is instructed, the pseudo variation by the quasi-continuation is performed 5 times within the variation time of 55 seconds, and the details are finally removed without reaching reach. One variation pattern is prepared. However, the change F is instructed only when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal state as described above.

  Therefore, when either of the fluctuations D and E is instructed from the main controller 110, the MPU 221 prepares for each according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, regardless of the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223a. Based on the determined detailed variation pattern, the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, and the detailed variation pattern is notified to the display control device 114 by a display variation pattern command. When the fluctuation F is instructed from the main controller 110, the MPU 221 determines the only detailed fluctuation pattern prepared by the MPU 221, regardless of the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223a. The output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, and a detailed variation pattern thereof is notified to the display control device 114 by a display variation pattern command.

  Here, in the sound lamp control device 113, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the stop type indicated by the stop type command received so far (15R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, 2R probability big hit, front / rear outreach, front / rear out of front / rear) Non-reach, complete deviation) and the number of fluctuations.

  For example, in the stop type command corresponding to a certain variation effect, when 15R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot is indicated as the stop type, after the jackpot effect after the variation effect, until the next jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 It is determined that the gaming state is a probable change state. Also, in the stop type command corresponding to a certain variation effect, when the 15R normal jackpot is indicated as the stop type, after the jackpot effect after the variation effect until 100 variation effects are performed, or the next jackpot Until it becomes, it is judged that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a short time state. Then, after 100 fluctuation effects, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be the normal state until the next big hit.

  The time-saving BGM playback flag 223c is used as background music (hereinafter referred to as "BGM (Back Ground Music)") as a BGM (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving BGM") used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state. Is a flag indicating that playback is in progress. When the time / intermediate BGM playback flag 223d is ON, it indicates that the time-saving BGM is being played back as BGM, and when it is OFF, it indicates that BGM other than the time-shortening BGM is being played back.

  The time-saving BGM regeneration flag 223c is set to OFF as an initial value in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the startup process (see FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on. When the reproduction of the time-saving BGM is started under the control of the MPU 221, the time-saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is set to ON (S2148 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, when the reproduction of the time reduction BGM is stopped by the MPU 221, the time reduction BGM reproduction flag 223c is set to OFF (S2149 in FIG. 28).

  In the present embodiment, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state, if a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is detected, the player is notified that there has been a ball. The incoming sound to be output is output from the audio output device 226. The pachinko machine 10 is configured to output the incoming sound in accordance with the rhythm (beat) of the time-saving BGM.

  Specifically, when the MPU 221 receives the reserved ball number command from the main controller 110 when the time-saving BGM regeneration flag 223c is on, the MPU 221 determines that there is a ball entering the first ball inlet 64, and first of all. Stock that information. Further, the MPU 221 manages the timing of the beat of the time-shortening BGM generated by the audio output device 226. Then, at the timing of the beat of the time-shortening BGM or the middle of the beat and beat (back beat), the sound output device 226 generates the incoming sound corresponding to the stocked incoming ball.

  As a result, the incoming sound is pronounced in time with the beat of the time-saving BGM, so that a sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically on the rhythm of the time-saving BGM, so that the player's feelings about the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in games can be enhanced.

  In addition, when the entrance to the first entrance 64 is continuously performed, the MPU 221 is stocked not only at the timing of the beat of the time-saving BGM but also at the timing of the back beat (the middle of the beat and the beat). An incoming sound corresponding to the incoming ball is generated by the voice output device 226. Thereby, since a more complicated rhythm can be carved by the incoming sound, the player can be further enjoyed.

  Further, when the MPU 221 generates the incoming sound, the MPU 221 determines the pitch of the incoming sound based on the time-saving BGM code (chord) at the sound generation timing. Specifically, one pitch is selected from the pitches of the constituent sounds constituting the chord as the pitch of the incoming sound. For example, if the time-saving BGM chord is “C” at the sounding timing of the incoming sound, one of the constituent sounds “Do”, “Mi”, and “So” of the chord is set to the pitch of the incoming sound. Select.

  As a result, the incoming sound is not only pronounced in time with the beat of the time-saving BGM, but is also produced with a pitch that matches the chord of the time-saving BGM at that time. Therefore, since the chord is composed of the incoming sound and the time-saving BGM, it is possible to make the player listen to a more pleasant sound. In addition, when a ball enters the first ball slot 64, a melody accompanied by a time-saving BGM can be composed of the ball pitch sound, and the player can listen to it. In addition, the melody differs depending on the timing and number of balls entered. Therefore, the player can be entertained by various melodies that are played by the incoming sound from time to time.

  Furthermore, when the MPU 221 sounds the incoming sound corresponding to the incoming ball stock stocked in the same code in the time-saving BGM three times in succession, the first incoming sound and the third incoming sound are Then, the pitch is selected from the constituent sounds, and the second incoming sound is selected as a sound that connects the first constituent sound and the third constituent sound in a musical scale. For example, if the time-saving BGM chord when the incoming sound is pronounced three times in succession is “C”, the pitch of the first incoming sound is set as the constituent sound “do” and the third incoming sound The pitch of the ball sound is defined as the constituent sound “mi”, and the pitch of the second incoming sound is defined as the elapsed sound “re”. As a result, the three incoming sounds are sounded sequentially in the order of “do”, “le”, and “mi” while matching the beat of the BGM of the chord “C”, so that the width of the melody played by the incoming sounds is reduced. spread. That is, the incoming sound is pronounced while inserting the incoming sound with the elapsed sound as the pitch between the incoming sounds with the pitch of the constituent sounds of the BGM as the pitch of the BGM. Thus, it is possible to give variations to the melody by the incoming sound accompanied by the time-saving BGM. Therefore, the melody due to the incoming sound does not become monotonous, and voice output that does not bore the player can be performed.

  The start winning counter 223d is a counter for counting the number of balls that have entered the first entrance 64, that is, the number of start winnings. When the MPU 221 receives a pending ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 when there is a ball entering the first ball inlet 64, the MPU 221 adds 1 to the start winning counter 223d, and the first ball inlet The ball to 64 is stocked (S2010 in FIG. 25).

  When the time-saving BGM playback flag 223c is on and the time-saving BGM is being played back as BGM, if the start winning counter 223d is a value of 1 or more at the timing of the beat of the time-saving BGM, that is, If the entrance to the first entrance 64 is stocked, an entrance sound having a pitch of one of the constituent sounds of the BGM chord at that time is generated at the timing of the beat (see FIG. 29). As a result, the incoming sound representing the entrance to the first entrance 64 can be pronounced in accordance with the beat and chord of the time-saving BGM, and the player can listen to a rhythmic and pleasant sound. Can do.

  Also, when the value of the start winning counter 223d is 2 or more at the timing of the back beat of the time-shortening BGM and there is a sound of the incoming ball sound in the previous beat, the code of the time-shortening BGM at the time of the back beat On the condition that the chord of the time-saving BGM at the timing of the next beat is the same chord, an incoming sound is generated with the elapsed sound of that chord as the pitch (see FIG. 30). As a result, when the entrance to the first entrance 64 continues, the entrance sound is generated using the timing of the back beat of the time-saving BGM, so that a complicated rhythm by the entrance sound can be engraved. it can. In addition, at the timing of the preceding and following beats, the incoming sound is pronounced with the pitch of the chord component sound, whereas the incoming sound that is pronounced at the back beat timing has the pitch of the elapsed sound of the chord. Therefore, as described above, the melody based on the incoming sound can have variations.

  The start winning counter 223d is decremented by 1 (S2167 in FIG. 29, S2179 in FIG. 30) when a winning sound is generated. The start winning counter 223d is initialized to 0 when the reproduction of the time-saving BGM is started as BGM (S2148 in FIG. 28). Therefore, the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 during the reproduction of the time-saving BGM can be stocked using the start winning counter 223d.

  In addition, when the value becomes 3, the start winning counter 223d does not count the number of balls entered even if there is a ball entering the first ball inlet 64 (even if a reserve ball number command is received). (S2009 in FIG. 25). That is, the number of entrances to the first entrance 64 is not stocked beyond three.

  In this pachinko machine 10, since the incoming sound is generated in accordance with the beat (or back beat) of the BGM for time reduction, when the entrance to many first entrances 64 is stocked, it is stocked last. The sound of the incoming sound with respect to the incoming ball will be delayed greatly from the actual incoming ball, and the difference between the actual incoming ball and the sounding timing of the incoming sound will be noticeable, making the player feel uncomfortable. This is because there is a risk of holding them. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, by limiting the stock of the entrance to the first entrance 64 to 3 balls, it is possible to suppress the difference between the actual entrance and the sound generation timing of the entrance sound from becoming noticeable. it can.

  Also, assuming that the tempo of the BGM for time reduction (number of beats per minute) is, for example, 160 BPM (Beats Per Mute), the launch of the ball is less than 100 balls per minute, so the time of one beat Thus, it can be said that there are almost no stocks exceeding 3 balls in the first winning opening 64. Therefore, even if the number of entrances to the first entrance 64 is restricted so as not to be stocked in excess of 3, the entrance to the first entrance 64 where no entrance sound is generated can actually occur. In addition, the player does not feel uncomfortable because the incoming sound is not pronounced.

  The upper limit of the number of stocks may be changed according to the tempo of the time-saving BGM, assuming that the number of balls launched within a predetermined time is constant. For example, when the tempo of the time-saving BGM is 100 BPM, the number of beats per minute is smaller than when the tempo is 160 BPM, and therefore the timing at which the incoming sound is generated is also reduced. Therefore, the number of balls to be stocked may be set to 4, for example. Thereby, an incoming sound can be pronounced with respect to more incoming balls.

  Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the stock number is determined and the incoming sound is pronounced for the entrance to the first entrance 64, but it may be configured without providing the upper limit of the stock number. Good. In this case, as described above, when many entrances to the first entrance 64 are stocked, the sound of the entrance sound for the last stocked entry is greatly delayed from the actual entrance. However, the melody played by the delayed incoming sound makes it possible to immerse the player in entering the game.

  The frame button operation effect flag 223e is a flag indicating that an effect that requires operation of the frame button 22 is performed in the variable effect performed in the third symbol display device 81. The effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is, for example, that the player can hit the frame button 22 repeatedly and display a predetermined character on the third symbol display device 81, so that the variation effect may be a big hit. When the development from the normal reach to the super reach is performed, the selection screen for the super reach production mode is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 during the normal reach so that the player can select the super reach production mode. Includes production.

  The frame button operation flag 223e indicates that an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is performed when turned on, and an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is performed when turned off. Indicates no.

  The frame button operation effect flag 223e is set to OFF as an initial value in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the startup process (see FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on. Then, when an effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is started during the changing effect, the frame button operation effect flag 223e is set to ON (S2139 in FIG. 28). In addition, when the effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 ends, the frame button operation effect flag 223e is set to OFF (S2141 in FIG. 29).

  In the present embodiment, when an effect that requires operation of the frame button 22 is performed in the variation effect, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, an operation for notifying that the frame button 22 has been operated. Sound is output from the audio output device 226. The pachinko machine 10 is configured to output the operation sound in accordance with the rhythm (beat) of the BGM.

  Specifically, when the frame button operation effect flag 223e is on, the MPU 221 executes a frame button operation sound output process (S2137 in FIG. 27), and a signal indicating that the operation has been performed from the frame button 22 is input. Then, first of all, the information is stocked. The MPU 221 also manages the timing of BGM beats generated by the audio output device 226. Then, the operation sound corresponding to the stocked operation is generated from the sound output device 226 at the timing of the beat of BGM or the middle of the beat (beat).

  As a result, the operation sound is pronounced in time with the beat of the BGM, so a sound with a rhythmic feeling is output. Therefore, the player can play the game while operating the frame button 22 rhythmically on the BGM rhythm, so that the player's feelings about the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in games can be enhanced.

  In addition, when the player continuously operates the frame button 22, the MPU 221 sends an operation sound corresponding to the operation stored not only at the BGM beat timing but also at the back beat timing from the audio output device 226. Pronounce. Thereby, since a more complicated rhythm can be carved by the operation sound, the player can further enjoy the operation of the frame button 22.

  Also, the MPU 221 determines the pitch of the operation sound based on the BGM chord (chord) at the sounding timing even when the operation sound is sounded in the same way as the sound of the incoming ball sound during the time-saving BGM playback. To do. Thereby, the operation sound and the BGM constitute a chord while matching the rhythm, so that the player can hear a more pleasant sound. In addition, when the player continues to operate the frame button 22, a melody accompanied by BGM can be constituted by the operation sound and can be heard by the player. Moreover, the melody differs depending on the operation timing and the number of operations. Therefore, in order to listen to various melody played by the operation sound from time to time, the player has a desire to operate the frame button 22 with various rhythms. Therefore, it is possible to give the player further enjoyment of the game.

  Further, the MPU 221 performs the first operation when the operation sound corresponding to the operation stocked in the same code in the BGM is pronounced three times in a manner similar to the sound of the incoming sound during the time-saving BGM reproduction. For the sound and the third operation sound, a pitch is selected from the component sounds, and for the second operation sound, a progress sound that connects the first component sound and the third component sound in a scale is selected.

  Thereby, by making the operation sound pronounced while inserting the operation sound having the elapsed sound pitch between the operation sounds having the pitch of the constituent sound of the BGM chord while matching the rhythm of the BGM, Variations can be given to the melody by the operation sound accompanied by BGM. Therefore, the melody by the operation sound does not become monotonous, and voice output that does not get the player bored can be performed.

  In the present embodiment, it is assumed that an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is not performed while the time-saving BGM is being reproduced. That is, the operation sound indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated is not generated during the period in which the incoming sound indicating the entrance to the first entrance 64 is generated.

  The frame button operation frequency counter 223f is a counter for counting the number of times the player has operated the frame button 22. When the MPU 221 receives a signal indicating that it has been operated from the frame button 22, the frame button operation frequency counter 223f is displayed in the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1907 in FIG. 24) executed in the main process. 1 is added and the operation to the frame button 22 is stocked.

  Then, when the frame button operation effect flag 223e is on and the effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is performed in the variation effect performed in the third symbol display device 81, the frame button operation on output is performed. If the process is executed (S2137 in FIG. 27) and the frame button operation count counter 223f has a value of 1 or more at the beat timing of BGM, that is, if the operation to the frame button 22 is stocked, At the timing, a process of generating an operation sound having one of the constituent sounds of the BGM chord as a pitch is performed. Thereby, the operation sound representing the operation on the frame button 22 can be pronounced in accordance with the beat and chord of the BGM, and the player can hear a rhythmical and pleasant sound.

  Also, if the value of the frame button operation counter 223f is 2 or more at the BGM back beat timing and the operation sound is pronounced in the previous beat, the BGM code and the next On the condition that the BGM chord at the beat timing is the same chord, a process of generating an operation sound with the elapsed sound of the chord as the pitch is performed. Thereby, when the operation to the frame button 22 continues, the operation sound is generated using the timing of the back beat of the BGM, so that a complicated rhythm by the operation sound can be carved. In addition, at the timing of the preceding and following beats, the operation sound is pronounced with the pitch of the chord component sound, whereas the operation sound pronounced at the timing of the back beat has the pitch of the elapsed sound of the chord, As described above, the melody based on the operation sound can have variations.

  The frame button operation frequency counter 223f is decremented by 1 when an operation sound is generated. Further, the frame button operation frequency counter 223f is also initialized to 0 when the frame button operation effect flag 223e is turned on (S2139 in FIG. 28). Therefore, when the frame button 22 is operated during a period in which an effect requiring the operation of the frame button is performed, the operation can be stocked by the frame button operation frequency counter 223f.

  In addition, when the value of the frame button operation number counter 223f becomes 3, even if there is an operation on the frame button 22, the operation is not counted. That is, do not stock more than three operations on the frame button 22.

  In this pachinko machine 10, since the operation sound is generated according to the beat (or back beat) of the BGM, when many operations on the frame button 22 are stocked, the sound of the operation sound corresponding to the last stocked operation is generated. This is because it is performed with a large delay from the actual operation, and the difference between the actual operation and the sound generation timing of the operation sound becomes remarkable, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, by limiting the stock of operations to the frame button 22 to three, it is possible to suppress the difference between the actual operation and the sound generation timing of the operation sound from becoming significant.

  An operation detection invalid period may be provided for the operation of the frame button 22. That is, when the operation of the frame button 22 is detected, the operation may be invalidated even if the frame button 22 is operated for a certain period (for example, 0.2 seconds) thereafter. As a result, it is detected that the frame button 22 has been operated based on vibration or the like caused by the operation of the frame button 22 once, and is recognized as an operation different from the operation intended by the player. Can be suppressed. When this operation detection invalid period is provided, for example, when an operation detection invalid period of 0.2 seconds is provided, even if the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit, the operation of the frame button 22 is performed for at least 0.2 seconds. Therefore, if the tempo of the BGM is 160 BPM (the cycle of one beat is 375 milliseconds), the number of operations of the frame buttons 22 stocked during one beat is at most two. Therefore, in this case, it is not particularly necessary to set an upper limit of stock for the number of operations of the frame button 22.

  The operation detection invalid period may be set according to the tempo of the BGM. For example, if the BGM tempo is 120 BPM (one beat cycle is 500 milliseconds), the operation detection invalid period is set to 0.25 seconds, and the BGM tempo is 150 BPM (one beat period is 400 milliseconds). ), The operation detection invalid period may be set to 0.2 seconds. As a result, the number of operations of the frame button 22 stocked during one beat is at most two, so even if there is no upper limit on the stock, the operation sound is generated using the timing of the BGM beat and back beat. Thus, when the frame button 22 is operated, the operation sound can be generated without delay.

  The pointer 223g is for designating an address in which various control information to be acquired at a certain time is specified from a data table in which various control information to be executed in the sound lamp control device 113 is specified in time order. A data table is prepared for each effect whose execution is controlled by the sound lamp control device 113, and a data table corresponding to all effects is stored in a data table storage area 222b (see FIG. 6) provided in the program ROM 222. Is done.

  When the MPU 221 determines an effect to be executed by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command received from the main control device 110, the MPU 221 reads a data table corresponding to the determined effect from the data table storage area 222b. In accordance with the read data table, the MPU 221 outputs a sound from the sound output device 226, lights / flashes the lamp display device 227, and operates the first accessory 87 (the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation). The motor 87e).

  In each address of the data table, control information to be executed by the sound lamp control device 113 is defined in order from the address “0001H” at the time indicated by the address. That is, when starting or stopping the reproduction of a predetermined sound at the first time, information instructing the start or stop of the predetermined sound is defined in association with the address corresponding to the first time. . When a predetermined lamp is lit at the second time, information for instructing lighting of the predetermined lamp is defined in association with an address corresponding to the second time. In the third time, when the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven and the first accessory 87 is lowered by a predetermined step, the first accessory 87 is associated with the address corresponding to the third time. Information for driving the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a to lower the accessory 87 by a predetermined step is defined.

  The pointer 223g is initialized to 0 once when the effect to be executed by the MPU 221 is determined and the use of the data table corresponding to the effect is determined (S2147 in FIG. 27). Then, the MPU 221 adds 1 to the pointer 223g before reading the control information from the data table, and reads the control information corresponding to the address indicated by the pointer 223g after the addition in the data table. Then, according to the contents instructed by the control information, the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, the operation of the first accessory 87 (the first accessory up / down movement motor 87a and the first accessory) (Drive of the rotation motor 87e) is controlled.

  Here, after the MPU 221 determines an effect to be executed by the audio lamp control device 113, when the data table corresponding to the effect is newly read, the MPU 221 starts the reading at the timing of the beat of the BGM ( S2123 in FIG. 27). Also, when counting up the pointer 223g (adding 1) and reading the control information associated with the address indicated by the pointer 223g from the data table, it is performed at the timing of the beat of BGM. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 starts or stops the sound output from the sound output device 226, lights / flashes the lamp display device 227, and operates the first accessory 87 (the first accessory up / down movement motor 87a and the first action The start of the driving of the single-function rotating motor 87e) can be performed at the timing of the beat of the BGM.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, the voice output, the lighting / flashing of the lamp, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, the interest in the game by the player can be enhanced.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 10, the operation timing of the 1st accessory 87 in the case of performing one notification by the 1st accessory 87 is demonstrated. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing of the first accessory 87. As shown in FIG. 10, when one announcement is made by the first accessory 87, the first accessory 87 stored inside the upper side of the center frame 86 is lowered by 80 steps in accordance with the beat of BGM. Start. Then, when the descent of the first accessory 87 is stopped in accordance with the beat of BGM, the first accessory 87 is moved up and down a plurality of times with a width of 20 steps. At this time, the rising / falling stop / start of the first accessory 87 is also performed in accordance with the beat of the BGM. Then, the first accessory 87 is finally lowered to the maximum point position according to the beat of BGM, and the rotation of the first accessory 87 is started at the maximum point position also according to the beat of BGM.

  As described above, when the MPU 221 determines an effect to be executed by the sound lamp control device 113 and then newly reads a data table corresponding to the effect, the MPU 221 starts the reading at the timing of the beat of the BGM. Since the control information associated with the address indicated by the pointer 223g is also read from the data table at the beat timing of BGM, for example, as shown in FIG. It can be operated according to the beat. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game rhythmically.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the execution execution timing of the variation effect will be described. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing the effect execution timing when the detailed change pattern is a pseudo-continuous as an example of the change effect.

  The start of the fluctuating effect is based on the timing of entering the ball into the first entrance 64 when the entrance to the first entrance 64 is not suspended, and to the first entrance 64. When the entry is suspended, it is determined based on the end timing of the fluctuating effect or jackpot effect that has been performed until immediately before, and cannot be matched with the beat timing of the BGM.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 performs display to vibrate the third symbol up and down from the original start timing of the fluctuation to the beat timing of BGM (symbol fluctuation period). Then, when the first BGM beat timing comes from the original variation start timing, reading of the data table corresponding to the detailed variation pattern determined for the variation effect is started at that timing, and Then, the third symbol display device 81 starts high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol.

  A display pattern is set in advance so that various effect images during the changing effect on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed in accordance with the beat of the BGM. In addition, the output from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display of the effect image and the lighting / flashing of the lamp of the lamp display device 227 are defined in the data table. Performed in time with the beat. For example, in the fluctuating effect shown in FIG. 11, the chance effect image indicating that the fluctuating effect is pseudo-stopped and re-variation is performed is performed in time with the beat of the BGM. In accordance with this, sound output corresponding to the chance-up image and lighting / flashing of the lamp are also performed in accordance with the beat of the BGM.

  Further, in the variation effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the 3rd symbol is once stopped and displayed at the timing of the beat of the BGM just before the original confirmation display is performed. The sound output device 226 generates a stop sound to be expressed. Thereafter, until the original confirmed display timing is reached, the 3rd symbol display device 81 performs a display of vibrating the third symbol up and down (design fluctuation period), and the 3rd symbol is finally displayed at the original confirmed display timing.

  As described above, the fluctuation effect is originally started irrespective of the beat of the BGM and is displayed in a definite manner, but in this embodiment, high-speed fluctuation is started in accordance with the timing of the beat, and once Stop display. Then, until the high-speed fluctuation starts from the original fluctuation start timing, and until the original fixed display timing comes after the stop display is performed, a display that vibrates the third symbol up and down is used as the symbol fluctuation period. Do. Thereby, in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, a change production is started according to the beat of BGM, and it can show to a player as if the stop display was performed. In addition, various effect images displayed during the change effect can be displayed in accordance with the beat of the BGM. Furthermore, the output of the sound corresponding to the change effect and the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227 are also possible. Can be done in time with the beat. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a sense that the variation effect is also performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, it is possible to perform a rhythmic game and improve the interest of the player.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. The timer counter 223h is a counter for counting the period of BGM beats. The MPU 221 uses the timer counter 223h to determine the timing of the BGM beat or back beat being played. The timer counter 223h is initialized to 1 when the BGM reproduced from the audio output device 113 is changed and reproduction of the changed BGM is started (S2146 of S28). At this time, the MPU 221 reads the BGM tempo (number of beats per minute) to be reproduced from the ROM 222, and calculates the beat period T (milliseconds) therefrom. The beat period T (milliseconds) is calculated by calculating 6000 milliseconds / (BGM tempo).

  Note that the tempo of the BGM is defined in advance in the ROM 222 for all the BGMs reproduced by the audio lamp control device 113. Here, the tempo of each BGM is determined in advance such that the beat period T is a multiple of 2 milliseconds. Thus, as will be described later, the timing of the BGM beat and the timing of the back beat can be easily determined simply by performing a process of incrementing the timer counter 223h by 1 every 1 millisecond.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the tempo of the BGM is defined in the ROM 222 in advance for all the BGMs played back by the audio lamp control device 113. The beat period T may be defined in the ROM 222 in advance. In this case, the beat period T of each BGM defined in the ROM 222 may be determined to be a multiple of 2 milliseconds.

  Thereafter, the timer counter 223h is incremented by 1 in the sound editing / output process executed every 1 millisecond. However, if the value of the timer counter 223h matches the beat period T, "1" is set instead of adding 1. Thus, the BGM beat cycle is counted by the timer counter 223h.

  When the value of the timer counter 223h is T, the MPU 221 reads the control information associated with the address indicated by the pointer 223g from the set data table, assuming that it is the timing of the beat of the BGM, and from the audio output device 226. Voice output, lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and operation of the first accessory 87 (driving of the first accessory up / down moving motor 87a and the first accessory rotating motor 87e) are controlled. As a result, in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, sound output, lamp lighting / flashing, and operation of the first accessory 87 are performed.

  Also, when the time-saving BGM is being played as the BGM, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the winning counter is dealt with at the timing when the value of the timer counter 223h becomes T or T / 2. Control to generate the winning sound. When an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is performed, when the operation to the frame button 22 is performed, the operation is performed at the timing when the value of the timer counter 223h becomes T or T / 2. Control to generate the corresponding operation sound. Therefore, since the incoming sound and the operation sound are generated at the timing of the BGM beat and the back beat, the player can listen to the incoming sound and the operation sound that match the rhythm of the BGM.

  The elapsed sound sound generation flag 223j is a flag indicating that an incoming sound or an operation sound having a pitch as the elapsed sound of the chord is generated in the back beat of the BGM. This indicates that the incoming sound or the operation sound is generated, and when it is off, the incoming sound or the operation sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound is not generated.

  The elapsed sound sound generation flag 223j is set to OFF as an initial value in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the startup process (see FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on.

  When the timing of the back beat is reached, the MPU 221 generates the incoming sound or the operation sound at the immediately preceding beat, and the number of the incoming balls to the first entrance 64 or the number of operations of the frame button 22 is stored. If it is two or more, it is determined whether or not the BGM code in the immediately preceding beat matches the BGM code in the immediately following beat. Note that the progression of chords is stored in advance in the program ROM 222 for all BGMs, and the MPU 221 can grasp the chords of BGM beats according to the progress of BGM playback.

  In this case, if it is determined that the BGM code in the immediately preceding beat matches the BGM code in the immediately following beat, the MPU 221 inputs the elapsed sound of that chord as the pitch at the timing of the back beat. A ball sound or an operation sound is generated, and the elapsed sound generation flag 223j is set to ON. Here, when the incoming sound or the operation sound with the elapsed sound as the pitch is generated in the back beat, as described above, since at least two or more incoming sounds or the number of operations are stocked, even in the immediately following beat , You will surely sound the incoming sound or operation sound.

  The MPU 221 refers to the elapsed sound sound generation flag 223j when the incoming sound or the operation sound is generated in the beat immediately after this. If the elapsed sound sound generation flag 223j is on, the incoming sound or the operation sound with the elapsed sound as the pitch is generated at the back beat timing. An incoming sound or an operation sound having a pitch corresponding to the constituent sound corresponding to the sound is generated. As a result, when an incoming sound or operation sound with the constituent sound as the pitch is played immediately after the back beat progress sound, the pitch that deviates from the progress sound played at the back beat is pronounced. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a strange melody when the incoming sound or the operation sound is pronounced while inserting the elapsed sound.

  The pitch information memory 223k is a memory for storing the pitch that is generated when the incoming sound or the operation sound is generated at the beat timing of the BGM. When the MPU 221 determines the sound of the incoming sound or the operation sound at the beat timing of the BGM, the MPU 221 stores the pitch in the pitch information memory 223k (S2166 in FIG. 29).

  Here, after sounding an incoming sound or operation sound having the pitch of the constituent sound of the chord with a certain BGM beat, the incoming sound having the elapsed sound of the same chord as the pitch at the subsequent back beat of the BGM Alternatively, in the pachinko machine 10, when the operation sound is generated and the incoming sound or the operation sound having the same chord component pitch as the pitch of the next BGM beat is generated, The pitch of the constituent sound at the sound and the next beat is determined based on the pitch of the constituent sound at the first beat. Correspondence between the pitch of the constituent sound at the first beat and the elapsed sound at the back beat and the pitch of the constituent sound at the next beat is a process provided in the program 222 for each chord that can be taken by the BGM. It is defined in the pitch setting table 222c (see FIG. 6) during sound reproduction.

  For example, in the elapsed sound playback pitch setting table 222c, the chord “C” is associated with the constituent sound “do” at the first beat, “re” as the elapsed sound at the back beat, and the next beat. “Mi” is defined as the component sound at the first beat, and “F” is assigned as the elapsed sound at the back beat, “So” as the component sound at the next beat, in association with the component sound “Mi” at the first beat. In association with the component sound “So” at the first beat, “F” is defined as the elapsed sound at the back beat, and “Mi” is defined as the component sound at the next beat. For the chord “D”, in association with the constituent sound “Re” at the first beat, “Mi” is defined as the elapsed sound at the back beat, and “Fa #” is defined as the constituent sound at the next beat, Corresponding to the constituent sound “Fa #” at the first beat, “So” is defined as the elapsed sound at the back beat, “La” is defined as the constituent sound at the next beat, and the constituent sound “ In association with “La”, “So” is defined as the elapsed sound in the back beat, and “Fa #” is defined as the constituent sound in the next beat. Also, for chord “F”, “seo” is defined as the elapsed sound in the back beat and “la” is defined as the constituent sound in the next beat in association with the constituent sound “fa” at the first beat. In association with the component sound “La” at the first beat, “Shi” is defined as the elapsed sound at the back beat, “Do” is defined as the component sound at the next beat, and the component sound “ Corresponding to “do”, “si” is defined as the elapsed sound in the back beat, and “la” is defined as the constituent sound in the next beat.

  For example, when the chord at a beat of a certain BGM is “C” and the MPU 221 generates an incoming sound or an operation sound with the constituent sound “Mi” as a pitch at that time, the pitch “M” Is stored in the pitch information memory 223k. When an incoming sound or operation sound having a pitch of the elapsed sound of the code “C” is generated at the timing of the subsequent beat of the BGM, the incoming sound or operation sound generated at the immediately preceding beat is recorded from the pitch information memory 223k. The pitch of the elapsed sound corresponding to the constituent sound “mi” in the code “C” is specified from the pitch setting table 222c for the elapsed sound reproduction. In this example, “Fa” is specified as the pitch of the elapsed sound, and the incoming sound or the operation sound with the elapsed sound “Fa” as the pitch is generated at the timing of the back beat.

  Further, when the incoming sound or operation sound having the pitch of the constituent sound of the chord “C” is generated at the timing of the next BGM beat following the back beat (that is, the elapsed sound sound generation flag 223j is turned on). ), The pitch of the incoming ball sound or the operation sound sounded at the immediately preceding beat is read from the pitch information memory 223k (in this example, “mi”), and the chord “C” corresponds to the constituent sound “mi”. The pitch of the constituent sound at the next beat is specified from the pitch setting table 222c during elapsed sound reproduction. In this example, “So” is specified as the pitch of the constituent sound at the next beat, and the incoming sound or the operation sound with the constituent sound “So” as the pitch is generated at the timing of the next beat.

  As a result, in each of the first BGM beat, the subsequent back beat, and the subsequent beat, the incoming sound or the operation sound is pronounced in the order of “mi”, “fa”, “so” corresponding to the BGM code “C”. The Therefore, when the incoming sound or the operation sound with the elapsed sound as the pitch is generated in the back beat between the beats where the incoming sound or the operation sound that generates the chord constituent sound is generated. Thus, it is possible to suppress the passage of a strange pitch from being generated or the occurrence of a pitch that deviates from the elapsed sound generated from the back beat in the beat after the back beat. Therefore, a beautiful melody can be played when the incoming sound or the operation sound is generated while the elapsed sound is inserted.

  In addition, the RAM 223 indicates a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, and whether or not the variable display should be started. It has a variation start flag (not shown). Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 25) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed. The variation start flag is turned on when a stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S2004 in FIG. 25), and is turned off when setting the variation display in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2102 in FIG. 26).

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, a sound output device 226, a first accessory vertical movement motor 87a, a first accessory rotation motor 87b, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like. Each is connected.

  The sound output LSI 301 is a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) that is directly connected to the MPU 221, generates sound to be reproduced based on an instruction from the MPU 221, and outputs the sound generated from the sound output device 226. A sound data ROM 306 is connected to the sound output LSI 301. The audio data ROM 306 is a memory in which various audio data are stored.

  When a playback start command is set by the MPU 221, the sound output LSI 301 specifies a sound to be played back included in the playback start command, reads out audio data corresponding to the specified sound from the audio data ROM 306, and plays it back The sound to be generated is generated, and the generated sound is output from the audio output device 226. Further, when a playback end command is set by the MPU 221, the MPU 221 specifies a sound to be played back included in the playback end command, and ends the playback of the specified sound.

  The sound output LSI 301 has 16 playback channels, and can generate up to 16 sounds simultaneously, synthesize (mix), and output from the sound output device 226.

  The data format stored in the audio data ROM 306 may be arbitrary. For example, a data format obtained by sampling a sound waveform by a linear pulse code fluctuation method may be used, or data may be compressed by various audio compression methods such as MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) and AAC (Advanced Audio Coding). It may be.

  Alternatively, a MIDI file compliant with the MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) standard for generating various sounds may be stored in the sound data ROM 306. In this case, the sound output LSI 301 includes a MIDI sound source, reads out from the audio data ROM 306 a MIDI file for reproducing the type of sound instructed to be played back by the MPU 221, and causes the MIDI sound source to sound according to the read-out MIDI file. Then, play the sound.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has at least an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input / output port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. doing.

  The voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input / output port 238, and the display control device 114 sends a command for instructing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the voice lamp control device 113 to the voice lamp control device. 113 is received.

  An MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, and an image controller 237 are also connected to the input / output port 238 via the bus line 240. A video RAM 236 is connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  The MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the command input from the sound lamp control device 113. The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The program ROM 232 includes at least a display data table storage area 232a and an additional data table storage area 232b.

  The display data table storage area 232a is an area in which a display data table prepared for each effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110 is stored. The display data table describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses in an effect corresponding to the display data table. The MPU 231 specifies an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, and reads a display data table corresponding to the effect from the display data table storage area 232a. Then, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled according to the read display data table.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described. The display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the sound lamp control device 113. Display data tables corresponding to the confirmed display effect and the restart effect are prepared.

  The demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols without the numerals “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The confirmed display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the stop symbol is confirmed and received by receiving a confirmed command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 after the variation effect. It is an effect that is displayed. For example, when the stop symbol is an out symbol, an effect of emphasizing the loss is performed, and when the stop symbol is either 15R probability big jackpot, 15R normal jackpot or 2R probability big jackpot, each jackpot is emphasized. Production is performed. The player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol by visually recognizing the final display effect.

  The restart effect is a predetermined position between the time when the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the change effect indicated by the change pattern command and the time when the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. This is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an image obtained by vibrating (swinging) the third symbol at the center. When the player visually recognizes that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the change of the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol is not fixed at that time. Can be recognized.

  In the display data table storage area 232a, one display data table corresponding to each of the demonstration effect and the restart effect is stored. A display data table for variation, which is a display data table for variation effect, is prepared for each table according to the combination of the variation effect pattern and the stop symbol set. In addition, the display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect includes a display for confirming an out symbol as a stop symbol, a display for confirming the probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot), and a normal jackpot (15R normal jackpot). ) Are displayed separately.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table for change in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and according to the type of the sprite, the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the translucency Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as people and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is fixed, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the display data table for change. This back surface type is any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (any one of “town stage”, “sea stage”, “mountain stage”) selected by the player operating the frame button 22. Or the information specifying whether to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. . On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the back image rendering content in the display data table will be described, but instead of this, the back surface type and the back surface type corresponding to which state You may make it prescribe | regulate the display status information which shows whether a back image should be displayed. The rear image is displayed with the display range, brightness, color, etc. changed with the passage of time. This display state information may be information indicating an elapsed time after the rear image in the initial state is displayed, for example. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image in the initial state indicated by the display state information is displayed.

  The display state information is information indicating an elapsed time from the start of drawing an image based on the display data table (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81). May be. In this case, the MPU 231 starts drawing the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the display data table (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81). Based on the state of the back image displayed in the stage and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the display state information (or display of the image on the third symbol display device 81) is started. Identify.

  Further, the display state information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image corresponding to the initial state is displayed and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the image based on the display data table depending on the rear surface type). It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the display on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is started, and the type information ( For example, it is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed, or the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 for the image based on the display data table). Information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the start of display) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the display state information may be information indicating an address at which a back image to be displayed is stored instead of information indicating elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), A unique identification number assigned to the third symbol is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. In the present embodiment, a unique identification number for identifying each of the third symbols is attached to each of the third symbols. For example, “0” is assigned to the main symbol “0”, “1” is assigned to the main symbol “1”, and “1” is assigned to the main symbol “2”. 2 "is attached.

  In addition, as the symbol type information of the third symbol from when the variation starts until the predetermined time elapses, the identification information of the third symbol is not directly defined, but the variation effect performed immediately before is stopped. Offset information with the symbol identification number is described. This offset information is information representing the difference between the identification numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  The offset information is specified as the symbol type information of the third symbol until the predetermined time elapses after the change is started. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the display of the variation effect performed immediately before. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol. Until the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the change, as the symbol type information at each address, the identification information of the third symbol to be displayed at the time corresponding to that address and the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before The difference (offset information) from the identification information is described. Thereby, the variation effect can be started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  In addition, as the symbol type information, the third symbol is displayed at a high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is switched to the identification number itself of the third symbol to be actually displayed. It is set so that the time is displayed in a variable manner. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 13). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. The selected display data table is read from the display data table storage area 232a, stored in a display data table buffer 233a (to be described later) provided in the work RAM 233, and the pointer 233c is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233c is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233c, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 changes the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in accordance with the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a.

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is to determine an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display content cannot be predicted. A display data table corresponding to each effect mode cannot be provided. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Returning to FIG. The additional data table storage area 232b is an area for storing an additional data table that defines display contents of effects to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to one effect based on a command from the main control device 110. is there. In the additional data table storage area 232b, an additional data table is prepared and stored for each effect to be displayed additionally.

  Here, “adding to one effect” means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, an image that is not normally displayed in one effect is displayed. The concept of displaying and changing another effect on the one effect, changing part or all of the color tone of the one effect, and changing the image displayed in the one effect. Is included.

  That is, the additional data table is a drawing content necessary for adding and displaying an image that is not normally displayed for one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main controller 110. Also, the drawing content required to change part or all of the color tone in the one production, and the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in the one production are predetermined. It is.

  Details of the additional data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the additional data table. In the additional data table, the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address is defined in detail in association with the address defined in the display data table. In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object to be additionally displayed in an image for one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  In the example of FIG. 14, in association with the address “0097H” defined in the display data table, a sprite type (character type: first combination) for one character (character 1: equivalent to an image of a movable combination). Display position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. On the other hand, if there is no display object to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, this means that there is no display object to be added corresponding to that address in the additional data table. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address “0001H” in FIG. 14).

  Note that the display content defined by the additional data table is, for example, for the variation effect displayed by the variation display data table selected based on the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) from the main controller 110. The additional data table defines the display content for displaying the preview effect image that is additionally displayed.

  As in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the additional data table, and the final address of the additional data table (“00FDH in the example of FIG. 14). “)” Describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the rendering content corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the additional data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 receives a command from the audio lamp control device 113 and decides to display the effect by adding the received command to the effect whose display has been started, the MPU 231 responds to the added effect. The additional data table is read from the additional data table storage area 232b and stored in the additional data table buffer 233b of the work RAM 233 described later.

  Then, every time the pointer 233c is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c is displayed from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. The image content to be drawn next is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 14, when the pointer 233g becomes “0097H”, the MPU 231 is specified by the address “0097H” of the additional data table to the various sprites specified by the address “0097H” of the display data table. The drawing list is created by adding the sprite of the character 1 and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 233c is “0001H”, Null data is defined at the address “0001H” of the additional data table, so it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and the address “ A drawing list is generated based on various sprites defined in “0001H”.

  When the information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the additional data table is “End” information, or when the pointer 233c indicates an address not specified in the additional data table (for example, In the example of FIG. 14, it is determined that there is no display object to be added even when the pointer 233c indicates an address after “00FEH”, and drawing is performed based on various sprites defined in the display data table. Generate a list.

  Then, by transmitting the generated drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. Thereby, according to the update of the pointer 233c, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table and the drawing contents specified in the additional data table are added. Therefore, the display data table and the additional data table An image as defined is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 should display the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. In addition to the effect image (for example, the variation effect image), when another effect image (for example, an image imitating the first accessory) is displayed, the addition corresponding to the other effect image to be displayed is added. By setting the data table in the additional data table buffer 233b, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. Thereby, for example, in the case where there are 32 types of original effect images and there are two types of other effect images to be displayed additionally, a display that prescribes an image in which other effect images are superimposed for each original effect image If a data table is prepared separately, 32 × (1 + 2) = 96 types of display data tables must be prepared. As in this pachinko machine 10, a data table corresponding to another effect image is used as an additional data table. By defining separately, 32 + 2 = 34 types of displays and additional data tables may be prepared, and an increase in the capacity of the ROM 232 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to store data tables corresponding to various types of effects in the capacity prepared in the ROM 232, and it is possible to easily further diversify the effects images.

  Moreover, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 233a by prescribing other effect images to be additionally displayed as the additional data table as in the pachinko machine 10, Even when display of other effect images to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to another effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a. By simply setting in the data table buffer 233b, other effect images to be added and displayed can be easily added to the original effect image and displayed.

  In addition, since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 233b. While updating the pointer 233c for each time from the table, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer, and easily draw one drawing list corresponding to one frame from these. Can be generated. Therefore, in addition to the effect performed based on the command from the main control device 110, even if the display of other effects is determined by the audio lamp control device 113 or the like, the effect to be displayed additionally is displayed. By defining the display contents in the additional data table, it is possible to easily perform a wide variety of presentations from a small number of data tables.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. The work RAM 233 has at least a display data table buffer 233a, an additional data table buffer 223b, a pointer 233c, a drawing list area 233d, and a time counter 233e.

  The display data table buffer 233a stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 113 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode in the display data table storage area 223a. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a.

  Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233c one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. A drawing list (see FIG. 15), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction for is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays effects corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a.

  The additional data table buffer 233b is displayed in addition to the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a in response to a command from the sound lamp control device 113 or the like. It is a buffer for storing an additional data table corresponding to the performance. As the MPU 231 stores the display data table in the display data table buffer 233a, the MPU 231 once writes Null data indicating that there is no display object to be added and displayed in the additional data table buffer 233b. Clear the contents.

  Thereafter, the MPU 231 performs an effect to be displayed in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a based on the command from the sound lamp control device 113 or the like. When there is an effect to be determined and added and displayed, an additional data table corresponding to the effect mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. Store.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233c one by one, and stores the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. In the additional data table, a drawing list (see FIG. 15) to be described later describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 is generated for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c. . As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the additional data table in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. If no additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, null data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 has an effect corresponding to the display data table. Is displayed as it is.

  The pointer 233c is for designating an address from which the corresponding drawing contents are to be acquired from the display data table and the additional data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233c to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. In the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the drawing process of one frame of image, the pointer The update process is executed (S2905 in the figure, see FIG. 42), and the value of the pointer 233c is incremented by 1 (see S2981 in FIG. 42).

  The MPU 231 updates the address indicated by the pointer 233c each time the pointer 233c is updated, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. A drawing list (see FIG. 15), which will be described later, is created by specifying the drawing contents defined in (1).

  Thereby, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, The effect corresponding to the additional data table can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a or the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. . Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  The drawing list area 233d is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 15, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite describes the address where the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored. The image controller 237 is a character described later provided in the character ROM 234. The image data of the sprite is acquired from the memory area designated by the address of the storage area 234a. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the ROM 234 is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value Processed, combined with other sprites according to the α blending information, color tone corrected according to the color information, and filtered according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information Above, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed in the video RAM 236 by the image controller 237.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, the MPU 231 draws the contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c and other images to be drawn. Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on the contents of the image (for example, a reserved image that displays the number of reserved balls, a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.) ) And rearrange the detailed information for each sprite to create a drawing list.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage address of the data of the sprite (display object) is the sprite type specified in the display data table and the additional data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the character storage area 234a where the image data of the sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 immediately sets the address where the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type. And the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  The MPU 231 also displays a display data table and additional data for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. The information specified in the table is copied as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be arranged on the most back side, and the last drawn sprite can be arranged on the most front side.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The time counter 233e is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233a. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 32B). ))), The time counter 233e is decremented by one every time the display setting process (S2603, see FIG. 39) is executed. As a result, when the value of the time counter 233e becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The character ROM 235 includes a character storage area 235a in which image data of each sprite such as a symbol (background symbol or decorative symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. In the character storage area 235a, in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored, the above-described image data is stored as compressed data. In the present embodiment, the image data before compression is composed of about 1024 Mbytes, and the image data of about 1024 Mbytes is compressed to about 768 Mbytes and stored in the character storage area 235a.

  The video RAM 236 is a memory having two frame buffer areas for storing an image for one frame displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The image controller 236 generates image data for one frame according to the drawing list, writes the image data in one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236, and image data for one frame written in the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236. And the read image data is output to the third symbol display device 81 via the output port 239, whereby a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The image controller 237 reads the sprite image data (compressed image data) defined in the drawing list from the character storage area 235a according to the order described in the drawing list, decompresses the image data, and draws the image data. Processing is performed in accordance with the drawing information defined in the list, and the image data of the sprite is written into one frame buffer area of the video RAM at the display position coordinates specified in the drawing list. Image data to be displayed in one frame is generated by decompressing, processing, and writing image data for all sprites defined in the drawing list.

  The writing of the image data for one frame to the one frame buffer area and the reading of the image data for one frame from the other frame buffer area are performed in parallel, and both are completed in 20 milliseconds. When the reading of the image data for one frame from the other frame buffer area is completed, the image data for one frame previously written from one frame buffer area is then read, while the other The next one frame of image data is written into the frame buffer area.

  In this manner, by alternately writing image data and reading image data in one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area, a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 16 to 22. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 milliseconds). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process The main process will be described.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading processes of various winning switches are executed (S1101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the counter buffer 202 b of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S1103). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When 899, 99, 99, 250) are reached, each is cleared to 0. The updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for performing display by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S1104), and then the first entrance port. A start winning process associated with winning 64 is executed (S1105). Details of the variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 and 19, respectively.

  After the start winning process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S1106), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S1107), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the fluctuation process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S1104). This variation process (S1104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) and controls the variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S1201). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S1201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S1202: No) Next, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S1203). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S1203: No), this processing is terminated as it is. Thereby, since the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1203, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the suspension of the fluctuation (S1203: Yes), the value of the retained ball number counter 203a (the number of retained balls N of the variable display held in the main controller 110) Is determined to be greater than 0 (S1204). If the value of the held ball number counter 203a (the number of held balls N) is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the value of the held ball number counter 203a (the number of held balls) N) is subtracted by 1 (S1205), and the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1206). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203c to the execution area side. The reserved first area → the execution area, the reserved second area The data in each area is shifted, such as → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area. After the data shift process, the fluctuation start process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1207). The variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1204, if it is determined that the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of held balls N) is 0 (S1204: No), a state where a demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, that is, It is determined whether or not a demonstration is being performed (S1208). In this determination process, after a demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, the value of the retained ball number counter 203a (the number of retained balls N) is determined to be greater than zero. It is determined that the interval is being demonstrated.

  If it is determined that the demonstration is not in progress (S1208: No), a demo command is set (S1209), and this process ends. If it is determined that the demonstration is in progress (S1208: Yes), This process is finished as it is. The demo command set in the process of S1209 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1701) of a main process (see FIG. 22) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the demo command as it is to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 performs control so as to display a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the demo command.

  Here, as described above, the demo command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation stop. Therefore, when the variable display is not started when a predetermined time has elapsed after the change is stopped, the demo command can be set and the demonstration effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1202, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the changing time has passed (S1210). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time has elapsed. If not (S1210: No), the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is updated (S1211), and this process is complete | finished.

  In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  The variation process is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S1210: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1212). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a variation start process (S1207) described later with reference to FIG. That is, whether or not a big hit is determined by the processing of S1206 according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c, and if the big hit, Depending on the value of the counter C2, the symbol will be a 15R probability variation jackpot after the jackpot (the maximum number of rounds is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a big round of 15 rounds) Or a symbol that becomes a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds).

  In the present embodiment, a blue LED is lit when the 15R probability variable big hit is reached after the big hit, a red LED is turned on when the 2R probability variable big hit is reached, and the red LED and the blue LED are turned on when the 15R normal big hit is reached. Turn on the LED. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S1212, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. Then, a confirmation command is set for confirmation (S1213), and this process is terminated. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the variation time elapses, the third symbol display device 81 stops the variation, and the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is confirmed by receiving the confirmation command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the change start process (S1207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S1207). This variation start process (S1207) is executed in the variation process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. In addition to performing a lottery (win / no-go decision) for “big hit” or “off”, an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of a variation effect performed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the variation start process, first, a lottery (win / no-go determination) process is performed to determine whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c (S1301). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the gaming state at that time. As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state, “7,307,582” associated with the “low probability state” in the jackpot random number table 202a becomes the jackpot random value, and the pachinko machine When the ten gaming states are in a high probability state, “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, associated with the“ high probability state ”in the jackpot random number table 202a. 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ”are the jackpot random numbers. In the process of S1301, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c is compared with the jackpot random number value. Determine.

  If it is determined as a big hit as a result of the processing of S1301 (S1301: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c, A display mode is set (S1302). In this process, the jackpot type set by the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202c, that is, whether the maximum round number is 15R probable big hit after a big hit of 15 rounds, or the maximum round number is 2. The display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is based on whether the 2R probability variation jackpot that shifts to the high probability state after the big jackpot of the round or the 15R normal jackpot that shifts to the low probability state after the jackpot of the 15th round is the maximum round number. LED 37a lighting state) is set. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, in order to stop and display the jackpot symbols corresponding to various jackpots on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) is the stop type. Set as

  Next, a variation pattern (variation time) at the time of jackpot is determined (S1303). The determination of the variation pattern is performed based on the jackpot type set in the processing of S1302, the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the jackpot variation pattern table 202c. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1303, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  If it is determined in step S1301 that the game is not a big hit (S1301: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S1304). In the processing of S1304, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is front / rear detach reach, reach other than front / rear detachment, or complete detachment. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state. Yes.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S1305). This variation pattern is determined by the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is a high probability state, a short time or a low probability state other than a short time), the stop type set in the processing of S1302, and the variation type counter CS1. And the deviation variation pattern table 202d. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1305, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  When the processing of S1303 or S1305 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern type determined by the processing of S1303 or S1305 is set (S1306). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S1302 or S1304 is set (S1307). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 22). The

  Next, the start winning process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S1105). This start winning process (S1105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 16), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start winning) at the first entrance 64. Then, the hold processing of the values indicated by the various random number counters is executed.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning slot 64 (start winning) (S1401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S1401: Yes), the value of the held ball number counter 203a (the number of held balls N of the variable effects held in the main controller 110) is obtained. It is determined whether or not it is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1402). Then, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S1401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, if the number N of operation reservation balls is not N <4 (S1402: No) Return to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S1401: Yes) and the number of reserved balls N <4 (S1402: Yes), the value of the held ball number counter 203a (the number of held balls N) 1 is added (S1403), and the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in step S1103 are added to the free storage area of the storage ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Are stored in the first area (S1404).

  Next, a reserved ball number command including the reserved ball number N updated by the process of S1403 is created (S1405), the created reserved ball number command is set (S1406), the start winning process is terminated, Return to process. This reserved ball number command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 22). The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls in the voice lamp control device 113 based on the number of held balls N included in the number of held balls command.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1501), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner by the payout / emission control apparatus 311, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1604). If it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1611. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shut-off has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1611 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S1611 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1712 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1611, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1611). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1612, S1613) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1612), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1613). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1607: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the payout control device 111 to the gaming state at the time of driving power interruption is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1610, an interrupt is permitted (S1610). And it transfers to the main process mentioned later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1701 to S1705 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1708 and S1709 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) is transferred to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. ) Is executed (S1701). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S1101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 16) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, a confirmation command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the counter buffer 203 b of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703). Mouth) A large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing 65a is executed (S1704). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, display control processing of the second symbol (for example, “◯” or “x” symbol) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1705). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. The variation display of the second symbol is performed at. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed according to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1707). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1707: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the processes after S1701 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1707: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1708, S1709).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1708). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer 203b of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1702 (S1709).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1706, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1 As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 20 has been executed, the power-off process after S1710 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1710), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1711). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1712), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1713), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1706 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1705 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1708 and S1709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1701. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1701 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the initial setting process (S1601) without saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1701. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is activated when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1801). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S1918 (see FIG. 24) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 24, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1915 in FIG. 24), it executes a power-off process in S1918. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1918 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1802: No), the current start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off in S1918 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1803).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to S1804, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1803: No), the process proceeds to S1808.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1804. On the other hand, this start-up process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1918, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If it is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223. Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1803: No), and the process proceeds to S1808.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1802: Yes), the startup process of this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1918, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1804, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1804, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1804). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1806). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a reading / writing check abnormality is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1808, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1918 is executed (see S1917 in FIG. 24). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1918 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S1808. This is a case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1918 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S1808: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1809), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1811), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1808 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1808 is performed via the processes of S1804 to S1806. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: No), S1809, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1810, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810), and interrupt permission is set. In step S1811, the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1809 is that when the process from S1804 to S1808 is reached via the process in S1806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1804. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the previous execution of the process of S1901 (S1901). If 1 msec or more has not elapsed (S1901: No), S1902 The process proceeds to S1913 without performing the process in S1911.

  In step S1901, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed in steps S1902 to S1912 regarding display, sound, and operation setting of the first accessory 87 (that is, setting of production). This is because it is preferable to execute the fluctuation display process in S1913 and the command determination process in S1914 in a short cycle, while it is not necessary to edit within 1 ms). By executing the process of S1914 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the process of S1913 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If the process of S1901 is executed for the first time after execution of the main process is started after the start-up process, the process proceeds to S1902 without determining whether one millisecond or more has elapsed. Alternatively, when the process of S1901 is executed for the first time after execution of the main process is started after the start-up process, it may be assumed that 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1901, and the process may proceed to S1902.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1901 (S1901: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1903 to S1914 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114. Subsequently, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1909 described later (S1903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1904). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1907 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1907). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Also, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during the high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed.

  In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1907 is omitted.

  In addition, when an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is performed in the variable effect, the process of counting the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated using the frame button operation frequency counter 223f is also monitored by the frame button input.・ It is performed in the production process. Thus, the operation of the frame button 22 is stocked according to the frame button operation count 223f. The operation of the frame button 22 stocked here is used to output an operation sound for notifying that the operation of the frame button 22 has been performed in accordance with the beat of the BGM.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1907) is completed, a sound editing / output process is then executed (S1908). In the sound editing / output process, according to the data table corresponding to the effect set by the command from the main controller 110, and according to the state of entering the first entrance 64 and the operation state of the frame button 22, the sound The sound output from the output device 226 is specified, the sound output LSI 301 is controlled, and processing for outputting various sounds from the sound output device 226 is executed. Details of the sound editing / output processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, a lamp editing process is executed (S1909). In the lamp editing process, the third symbol is displayed in accordance with the data table corresponding to the effect set by the command from the main control device 110, and according to the state of entering the first entrance 64 and the operation state of the frame button 22. The lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the display device 81.

  Next, the first accessory editing drive process is executed (S1910). In the first accessory editing drive process, the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e are driven and controlled in accordance with the data table corresponding to the effect set by the command from the main controller 110. The first effect 87 is operated, and the notice effect by the first feature 87 is executed.

  After the process of S1910, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1911), a counter update process is then performed (S1912), and the process proceeds to S1913. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process in S1909 is executed. In addition, the sound editing / output process in S1908 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the counter update process, various counters provided in the RAM 223 are updated. For example, the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b is updated during the counter update process. The detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b is updated by incrementing one by one within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in the present embodiment) and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (99).

  In the process of S1913, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. A variable display process, which is a process of temporarily storing the data for transmission, is executed. Details of this variation display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variable display process, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1914). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1914 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1915). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the process of S1915 (S1915: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1917), and the power-off process is executed (S1918). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1919), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1915 (S1915: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1916), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1916: No), the process returns to S1901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1916: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes.

  Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Further, the sound output from the sound output device 226 does not change, and the lighting / flashing of the lamp of the lamp display device 227 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1914) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1914). This command determination processing (S1914) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . This process also determines the start of the continuous notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 when a reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S2001). If it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S2001: Yes), the variation pattern type (any one of variations A to F and 2R variation) is extracted from the variation pattern command (S2002), and the process returns to the main process. .

  The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the RAM 223, and a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the stored variation pattern type in a variation display process (see FIG. 26) described later. The detailed variation pattern determined here is notified to the display control device 114 by a display variation pattern command, and the third symbol display device 81 produces a variation effect according to the notified detailed variation pattern. Done.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has not been received (S2001: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2003). If it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S2003: Yes), the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2004), and the stop type indicated by the stop type command is extracted. The data is stored in the RAM 223 (S2005).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a stop type command has not been received (S2003: No), it is then determined whether or not a pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2006). When it is determined that the held ball number command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the held ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 included in the held ball number command (that is, held by the main controller 110). The number of reserved balls of the variation effect) is extracted and stored in the reserved ball number counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2007).

  Here, the held ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), so that every time there is a starting win, the process of S2008 is performed. The value of the held ball number counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the held ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the held ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the held ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, when the start winning is detected, the voice lamp control device 113 The value of the held ball number counter 223a can be corrected to match the value of the held ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

  Further, after the process of S2007, a display-use reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the value of the held ball number counter 223a updated by the process of S2007 is set (S2008). As a result, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the start prize counter 223d is 3 (S2009). If the start prize counter 223d is not 3 (S2009: No), 1 is added to the start prize counter 223d (S2010), and the process returns to the main process. . If the start winning counter 223d is 3 (S2009: Yes), the process of S2010 is skipped and the process returns to the main process.

  Through the process of S2010, 1 is added to the start winning counter 223d in accordance with the reception of the reserved ball number command. Since the number-of-holding balls command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 when there is a ball entering the first ball slot 64, the start winning counter 223d enters the ball into the first ball slot 64. The number of (starting prizes) is counted. That is, the audio lamp control device 113 stocks the balls entered into the first ball slot 64 by the start winning counter 223d.

  In the case of the entry to the first entrance 64 stocked here, when the time-saving BGM playback flag 223c is ON and the time-saving BGM is being played back as BGM, the timing of the beat of the time-saving BGM is used. It is used to pronounce the incoming sound with the pitch of one of the constituent sounds of the BGM chord at that time. As a result, the entry representing the entry to the first entry slot 64 is pronounced in accordance with the beat and chord of the time-saving BGM, so that the player can hear a rhythmic and pleasant sound. .

  Further, if the number of balls entered into the first winning slot 64 stocked in the start winning counter 223d is 3 according to the determination in S2009, the starting winning counter 223d no longer enters the first winning slot 64. Even if the ball is not stocked and there is a ball entering the first ball slot 64, the ball is invalid from the viewpoint of counting by the start winning counter 223d.

  In this pachinko machine 10, since the incoming sound is generated in accordance with the beat (or back beat) of the BGM for time reduction, when the entrance to many first entrances 64 is stocked, it is stocked last. The sound of the incoming sound with respect to the incoming ball will be delayed greatly from the actual incoming ball, and the difference between the actual incoming ball and the sounding timing of the incoming sound will be noticeable, making the player feel uncomfortable. This is because there is a risk of holding them. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, by limiting the stock of the entrance to the first entrance 64 to 3 balls, it is possible to suppress the difference between the actual entrance and the sound generation timing of the entrance sound from becoming noticeable. it can.

  Also, assuming that the tempo of the BGM for time reduction (number of beats per minute) is, for example, 160 BPM (Beats Per Mute), the launch of the ball is less than 100 balls per minute, so the time of one beat Thus, there are almost no stocks of the first winning entrance 64 exceeding 3 balls. Therefore, even if the number of entrances to the first entrance 64 is restricted so as not to be stocked in excess of 3, the entrance to the first entrance 64 where no entrance sound is generated can actually occur. In addition, the player does not feel uncomfortable because the incoming sound is not pronounced.

  As a result of the process of S2006, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed. (S2011), the process proceeds to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114. Demo commands and confirmation commands received from the main control device 110 are set as display demonstration commands and display confirmation commands by the processing of S2011, and are transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the fluctuation display process (S1913) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this variation display processing (S1913).

  This variation display processing (S1913) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as described above. Therefore, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the display stop type for transmitting the stop type extracted from the stop type command to the display control device 114. This is a process for generating a command. Further, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is updated in accordance with the display of the variation effect, and a display reserved ball number command is set to notify the display controller 114 of the updated reserved ball number.

  In the variation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2101). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2101: No), the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are not received from the main controller 110. The fluctuation display process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag is on (S2101: Yes), the variation start flag is turned off (S2102), and then extracted from the variation pattern command in the process of S2002 of the command determination process (see FIG. 25). The variation pattern type (any one of variations A to F and 2R variation) in the changed variation effect and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command in the process of S2005 are acquired from the RAM 223 (S2103).

  Then, the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b is read, the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b, the variation pattern type and stop type acquired by the processing of S2103, and the current gaming state (normal state, A detailed variation pattern is determined based on the probability variation state or the short time state) and the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a (S2104).

  Only the variation time is defined as the variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, but by this S2104, one of various detailed variation patterns prepared for the variation time is selected. Two variation patterns are selected, and the selected variation pattern is determined as a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed.

  The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the stop type (15R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, 2R probability big hit, front / rear reach, reach other than front / rear reach, complete miss) indicated by the stop type command received so far. Judgment can be made based on the number of fluctuations.

  For example, in the stop type command corresponding to a certain variation effect, when 15R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot is indicated as the stop type, after the jackpot effect after the variation effect, until the next jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 It is determined that the gaming state is a probable change state. Also, in the stop type command corresponding to a certain variation effect, when the 15R normal jackpot is indicated as the stop type, after the jackpot effect after the variation effect until 100 variation effects are performed, or the next jackpot Until it becomes, it is judged that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a short time state. Then, after 100 fluctuation effects, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be the normal state until the next big hit.

  In addition, the ending command (command for performing an effect indicating the end of the jackpot) transmitted from the main controller 110 at the end of the jackpot includes the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after the jackpot (whether it is a probable change state or a short-time state) The sound lamp control device 113 may determine the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 from the gaming state included in the ending command. At this time, if the game state of the pachinko machine 10 after the jackpot included in the ending command is in the short-time state, the time until the time of 100 fluctuation effects is set to the short-time state, and then until the next jackpot Judged as normal.

  When a detailed variation pattern is determined in the process of S2104, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the determined detailed variation pattern is then generated, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. Is temporarily stored in the RAM 223 for transmission to the server (S2105). In addition, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type acquired by the processing of S2103 is generated, and the command is temporarily stored in the RAM 223 for transmission to the display control device 114. (S2106).

  The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Start display control of fluctuating effects. In addition, the display control device 114 receives the stop type command for display, selects a stop symbol suitable for the stop type, and when displaying the variation effect started by the display variation pattern command, Displays the selected stop symbol.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command generated by the processing of S2105 and S2106 are not immediately transmitted to the display control device 114 but are reproduced. Sent at the beat timing. The timing for starting the variation effect is determined by the control of the main controller 110 regardless of the rhythm of the BGM output by the sound lamp controller 113.

  However, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits the display variation pattern command generated by receiving the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 at the timing of the BGM beat being reproduced. Therefore, the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 by the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is started in synchronization with the beat timing of the BGM.

  In the display control device 114, in the variation display of the third pattern, various characters appear in accordance with the beat period of BGM, an effect image is displayed, a pseudo-stop is performed, or a fixed display is performed. The display data table and the additional data table are defined so that the stop display is temporarily performed.

  Therefore, by starting the variable display of the 3rd symbol in time with the beat of the BGM, various characters appear, effect images are displayed, pseudo-stop, pause display before the final display, etc. Both are performed at the timing of BGM beats. That is, in the third symbol display device 81, the changing effect is started in accordance with the beat of the BGM, and it can be shown to the player as if the stop display has been performed. Various effect images displayed during the change effect can also be displayed in accordance with the beat of the BGM.

  Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a sense that the variation effect is also performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, it is possible to perform a rhythmic game and improve the interest of the player.

  Next, in accordance with the setting of the display variation pattern command, the value of the retained ball number counter 223a is decremented by 1 as the retained ball is consumed (that is, the variation display corresponding to the retained ball is set). (S2107), a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the reserved ball number indicated by the value of the updated held ball number counter 223a is set (S2108). The display control device 114 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display reserved ball number command. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of balls held by counting the number of reserved balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, a data table corresponding to the detailed variation pattern determined by the processing of S2104 is specified (S2109). In the MPU 221, according to the data table specified here, the sound output from the audio output device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 228, while adjusting to the variation effect of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The operation of the first accessory 87 is controlled.

  Then, a display change start command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the change effect is set (S2110), and the process returns to the main process. The display variation start command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the process of S1902 of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  As described above, the display variation pattern command generated by the process of S2104 is not transmitted until the beat timing of the BGM, and the third symbol display device 81 uses the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The variation display of the third symbol is not executed until the beat timing of BGM is reached. However, the start timing of the variation effect is determined by the main control device 110 regardless of the BGM beat timing, and the main control device 110 transmits a variation pattern command instructing the start of the variation effect. Then, the 3rd symbol display device 81 must start the variable display of the 3rd symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, a display variation start command is once transmitted to the display control device 114 by the process of S2110. In response to the display variation start command, the display control device 114 starts a variation effect by performing a display that vibrates the third symbol up and down. After that, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the display variation pattern command to the display control device 114 at the BGM beat timing, thereby starting the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command from the BGM beat timing. The display of the variation of the third symbol is started. Thereby, it can be shown to the player as if the variation effect was started in accordance with the beat of BGM.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28, the sound editing / output processing (S1908) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. 27 and 28 are flowcharts showing the sound editing / output processing (S1908). As described above, the sound editing / output processing is performed in accordance with the data table corresponding to the effect set by the command from the main control device 110, and the entry situation to the first entry slot 64 and the operation situation of the frame button 22 as well. In response, the sound output from the sound output device 226 is specified, the sound output LSI 301 is controlled, and various sound is output from the sound output device 226.

  First, referring to FIG. 27, when the execution of the sound editing / output process is started, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the period T of the BGM beat being reproduced (S2121). As described above, the timer counter 223h is a counter for counting the period T of the BGM beat being reproduced. When the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the period T of the beat (S2121: Yes), the BGM being reproduced is reproduced. In step S2109 of the fluctuation display process (see FIG. 26), the execution of a new effect is determined in accordance with a command from the main control device 110, and the effect is determined. It is determined whether a data table to be used has been specified (S2122).

  The data table is a table in which various control information to be executed in the sound lamp control device 113 is defined in order of time, and is provided for all effects whose execution is controlled by the sound lamp control device 113 after the effect. It is a thing.

  If it is determined in the process of S2122 that the data table to be used is specified (S2122: Yes), the use of the specified data table is set (S2123), the pointer 223g is initialized to 0 (S2124), The process proceeds to S2125.

  The MPU 221 sequentially increments the pointer 223g initialized in S2124, and stores various control information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 223g of the data table set to be used by the processing in S2123 in the data table storage area. Read out from 222b, and according to the control information, the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, the operation of the first accessory 87 (the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation purpose) (Drive of the motor 87e) is controlled.

  Here, since the setting of the data table to be used is performed at the beat timing of the BGM, even if the effect to be executed according to the command from the main controller 110 is determined at an arbitrary timing, the audio output corresponding to the effect is output. Audio output from the device 226, lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and operation of the first accessory 87 can be started in accordance with the beat timing of the BGM.

  If the data table to be used is not specified as a result of the process of S2122 (S2122: No), the process of S2123 and S2124 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2125.

  In the process of S2125, it is determined whether or not there are temporarily displayed change pattern commands and display stop type commands by the processes of S2105 and S2106 of the change display process (see FIG. 26) (S2125). If the temporarily stored display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are in the RAM 223 (S2125), the temporarily stored display variation pattern command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. (S2126) Also, the temporarily stored display stop type command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2127). Then, the process proceeds to S2128. The display variation start command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the process of S1902 of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command generated by the processing of S2105 and S2106 are not immediately transmitted to the display control device 114 but are reproduced. It is transmitted at the timing of the BGM beat. Thereby, even if the start of the variation effect is determined at an arbitrary timing in the main control device 110, the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 by the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is performed. It can be started in time with the beat timing of BGM.

  The display control device 114 displays various characters in accordance with the BGM beat period, displays an effect image, performs a pseudo-stop, or displays a fixed display in the variation display of the third pattern. The display data table and the additional data table are defined so that the stop display is temporarily performed. Therefore, by starting the variable display of the 3rd symbol in time with the beat timing of BGM, various characters appear, effect images are displayed, pseudo-stop, stop display before final display, etc. Both can be performed at the timing of BGM beats. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a sense that the variation effect is also performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, it is possible to perform a rhythmic game and improve the interest of the player.

  If it is determined by the processing in S2125 that the temporarily stored display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are not in the RAM 223 (S2125: No), the processing in S2126 and S2127 is skipped, and the processing in S2128 is performed. Migrate to

  In the process of S2128, 1 is added to the pointer 223g (S2128), and then control information defined by the address indicated by the pointer 223g is read from the data table set by the process of S2123 (S2129). The MPU 221 counts up the pointer 223g by 1 and reads out the control information defined by the address indicated by the pointer 223g from the data table, so that this sound is based on the control information defined in time order by the data table. Audio output from the audio output device 226 and lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227 through the editing / output processing, the lamp editing processing (S1909) of the main processing (see FIG. 24), and the first accessory editing driving processing (S1910). The operation of the first accessory 87 (drive of the first accessory up / down movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e) is controlled.

  Here, the processing of S2129 is performed at the timing of the BGM beat being reproduced. That is, the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled at the timing of the BGM beat being reproduced. Thereby, in the pachinko machine 10, the sound output, the lighting / flashing of the lamp, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, the interest in the game by the player can be enhanced.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the sound reproduction start information is included in the control information read out in the process of S2129 (S2130). As a result, if there is sound reproduction start information (S2130: Yes), a reproduction start command including information on the sound to start reproduction is set in the sound output LSI 301 according to the sound reproduction start information (S2131), and the process proceeds to S2132. Transition. The sound output LSI starts reproduction of the sound indicated by the reproduction start command based on the set reproduction start command, and outputs the sound from the audio output device 226.

  If there is no sound reproduction start information in the process of S2130 (S2130: No), the process of S2131 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2132. In the process of S2132, it is determined whether or not the sound reproduction stop information is included in the control information read out in the process of S2129 (S2132). As a result, if there is sound reproduction stop information (S2132: Yes), a reproduction stop instruction including information on the sound to stop reproduction is set in the sound output LSI 301 according to the sound reproduction stop information (S2133), and the process proceeds to S2134. Transition. Based on the set playback stop command, the sound output LSI stops playback of the sound indicated by the playback stop command.

  Here, in the control information read from the data table by the processing of S2129, it is a sound other than BGM that is instructed to start or stop sound reproduction. That is, for the sound other than the BGM, the sound reproduction start and stop can be performed at the timing of the BGM beat by the processing of S2130 to S2133, and the player can play a rhythmic game. It should be noted that the start and stop of the BGM sound playback is the BGM that has been played up to that point when the BGM change timing is reached by the processing of S2143 (see FIG. 28) to be described later, regardless of the BGM beat timing. Playback is stopped, and playback of a new BGM is started.

  If it is determined by the process of S2132 that there is no sound reproduction stop information (S2132: No), the process of S2133 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2134. If the value of the timer counter 223h is different from the BGM beat period T by the process of S2121 (S2121: No), the process of S2122 to S2133 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2134.

  In the process of S2134, it is determined whether or not the time-saving BGM regeneration flag 223c is turned on (S2134). If the time-shortening BGM regeneration flag 223c is turned on (S2134: Yes), a start winning sound output process is executed (S2135). ). In the start winning sound output process, when the time-saving BGM is being played back as a BGM, the incoming sound for notifying the first entrance 64 at the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM, This is a process of generating one of the constituent sounds of the time-shortening BGM chord with a pitch. Details of the start winning sound output processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the process of S2134, when it is determined that the time-saving BGM playback flag 223c is off (S2134: No), or after the start winning sound output process (S2135) is executed, the frame button operation effect flag 223e is then turned on. It is determined whether or not (S2136). As a result, if the frame button operation effect flag 223e is on (S2136: Yes), a frame button operation sound output process is executed (S2137). In this frame button operation sound output process, when an effect that requires operation of the frame button 22 is being performed, the frame button 22 is operated at the timing of the BGM beat or back beat being played at that time. This is a process of generating one of the constituent sounds of the BGM chord with a pitch as an operation sound for notifying that. This frame button operation sound output processing is configured by processing similar to the start winning sound output processing, and details thereof will be described after the description of the start winning sound output processing.

  In the process of S2136, when it is determined that the frame button operation effect flag 223e is off (S2136: No), or after the frame button operation sound output process (S2137) is executed, the process of S2138 shown in FIG. Migrate to In the processing of S2138, it is determined whether or not the control information read out in the processing of S2129 (see FIG. 27) includes the start information of the effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 (S2138). If there is start information of an effect that requires operation of the frame button 22 (S2138: Yes), the frame button operation effect flag 223e is set to ON, and the frame button operation frequency counter 223f is initialized to 0. (S2139). As a result, the frame button operation sound output process (S2137) described above is executed, and when the frame button 22 is operated during an effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22, the operation sound is a BGM beat or back beat. The process output at the timing is executed.

  In the process of S2138, when it is determined that there is no start information of the effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 (S2138: No), or after the process of S2139 is executed, then S2129 (see FIG. 27). It is determined whether or not the control information read out by the process includes end information of the effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 (S2140). If there is end information of the effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 (S2140: Yes), the frame button operation effect flag 223e is set to OFF (S2141). Thereby, the execution of the process in which the operation sound of the frame button 22 is output at the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat ends.

  In the process of S2140, when it is determined that there is no end information of the effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 (S2140: No), or after the process of S2141 is executed, the value of the timer counter 223h is then set. Update (S2142). The timer counter 223h is updated by setting 1 when the value of the timer counter 223h is the period T of the BGM beat being played, and when the value of the timer counter 223h is different from the period T, 1 is added to the timer counter 223h. Thereby, the timer counter 223h can count the period of the BGM beat being reproduced.

  Here, the tempo of each BGM is determined in advance such that the beat period T is a multiple of 2 milliseconds. Thereby, the timing of the beat of BGM and the timing of the back beat can be easily determined only by performing the process of incrementing the timer counter 223h by 1 every 1 millisecond.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is the BGM change timing (S2143). As the timing for changing the BGM, for example, the timing for starting playback of the BGM that is output when the jackpot is notified and the timing for starting or ending playback of the jackpot effect BGM that is output when the jackpot effect is given. In the production, there is a timing at which the reach production is started and the reproduction of the reach production BGM is started, and the reproduction of the reach production BGM is finished. These timings are grasped in accordance with control information defined in the data table set from time to time and commands received from the main controller 110.

  If it is determined by the processing of S2143 that the BGM is to be changed (S2143), playback starts with the BGM specified by the control information of the data table or the BGM according to the command received from the main control device 110 being started. The command is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2144). As a result, reproduction of the designated BGM is started and output from the audio output device 226.

  Next, the tempo of the type of BGM at which playback is started is read from the ROM 222, the beat period T (milliseconds) of the BGM is calculated, and stored in the RAM 223 (S2145). At this time, the beat period T (milliseconds) is calculated by calculating 6000 milliseconds / (BGM tempo). If the ROM 222 predetermines the BGM beat period T (milliseconds) instead of the BGM tempo, the process of S2145 reads from the ROM 222 the BGM beat period of the type at which playback is started. Just put it out.

  Further, the timer counter 223h is initialized to 1 (S2146). The MPU 221 updates the timer counter 223h while counting up during the sound editing / output process executed every 1 millisecond, and counts up to the BGM beat period T calculated in the process of S2145. The timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced can be grasped using the timer counter 223h.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the BGM to be played back is a time-saving BGM (S2147). If it is a time-saving BGM (S2147: Yes), the time-saving BGM playback flag 223c is set to ON (S2148). If it is not the time-saving BGM (S2148: No), the time-saving BGM regeneration flag 223c is set to OFF (S2149). As a result, while the time-saving BGM is being played back as BGM, the incoming sound for notifying the entrance to the first entrance 64 by the processing of S2134 and S2135 (see FIG. 27) is the beat of the time-saving BGM. A start winning sound output process that is reproduced at the timing is executed.

  After the process of S2148 or S2149 is completed, the sound editing / output process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. Also, as a result of the processing in S2143, if it is determined that it is not the BGM change timing (S2143: No), the sound editing / output processing is terminated as it is.

  Next, the start winning sound output process (S2135) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 29 and FIG. 29 and 30 are flowcharts showing the start winning sound output processing (S2135). As described above, the start winning sound output processing is performed when a time-saving BGM is being played back as a BGM, and a ball entering the first entrance 64 is notified at the timing of the BGM beat or back beat. In this process, one of the constituent sounds of the time-saving BGM chord is pronounced at a pitch.

  Referring to FIG. 29, in the start winning sound output process, it is first determined whether or not a winning sound immediate reproduction effect is being executed (S2151). The winning sound immediate reproduction effect is a time-saving effect when the winning sound is not output at the timing of the time-saving BGM beat or the back beat in the variation effect, but when the ball enters the first entrance 64. This is an effect that outputs the incoming sound at a predetermined pitch without waiting for the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM, and is one of the notice effects that suggests that the expectation that is a big hit is high. Whether or not the winning sound immediate reproduction effect is executed is determined based on the detailed variation pattern determined in the variation display process (see FIG. 26).

  The player usually performs the winning sound immediate reproduction effect while the incoming sound of the pitch corresponding to the time BGM chord is output in accordance with the time BGM rhythm. By recognizing that the incoming sound deviates from the rhythm of the time-saving BGM, and that it is pronounced at a predetermined pitch, it is recognized that there is a high degree of expectation that will be a big hit in its variation production, and will increase the interest in gaming be able to.

  When the winning sound immediate reproduction effect is being executed (S2151: Yes), it is determined whether or not the start winning counter 223d is 0 (S2152). If the start winning counter 223d is 0 (S2152: Yes), since there is no ball entering the first ball inlet 64, the start winning sound output processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the start winning counter 223d is not 0 (S2152), it means that there has been a ball entering the first ball slot 64, so that a start winning sound reproduction start command with a predetermined pitch is set. Is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2153). As a result, a winning sound having a predetermined pitch is output from the audio output device 226 without waiting for the timing of the BGM or the back beat. Next, the start winning counter 223d is decremented by 1 (S2154), and the start winning sound output process is terminated.

  If it is determined as a result of the processing of S2151 that the winning sound immediate reproduction effect is not executed (S2151: No), then, whether or not the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the beat period T of the time-saving BGM. Is determined (S2155). As a result, when the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the period T (S2155: Yes), it is the beat timing of the time-saving BGM, so that the incoming sound corresponding to the incoming to the first entrance 64 is generated. Execute the process for First, it is determined whether the value of the start winning counter 223d is 0 or not (S2156).

  If the value of the start winning counter 223d is not 0 (S2156: No), since the entrance into the first entrance 64 is stocked, a process of generating the entrance sound is executed. First, it is determined whether or not the chord is changed from the current beat in the BGM being played back (S2157). The progress of the time BGM chord is stored in the ROM 222, and the MPU 221 grasps the BGM beat code in accordance with the progress of the time BGM playback.

  Here, the progression of the time-saving BGM code stored in the ROM 222 is associated with the elapsed time from the start of BGM playback, and the BGM code from that elapsed time is defined. For example, a code “D” is associated with an elapsed time of 0 milliseconds, a code “G” is associated with an elapsed time of 720 milliseconds, and a code “A” is associated with an elapsed time of 1440 milliseconds. "D" is associated with the elapsed time 2160 milliseconds, and the association is completed. When the MPU 221 starts playback of the BGM sound, the MPU 221 monitors the playback elapsed time, and immediately after the BGM playback starts, the BGM code is “D” until the BGM playback elapsed time reaches 720 milliseconds. Until the BGM playback start time is changed from 720 milliseconds to 1440 milliseconds, the BGM code is “G”, and the BGM playback start time is changed from 1440 milliseconds to 2160 milliseconds. It is determined that the code is “A”. If the BGM playback start time is 2160 milliseconds, it is determined that the BGM code is “D”, the BGM playback elapsed time is reset to 0 milliseconds, and the BGM playback elapsed time again. The BGM code at that time is determined. Thereby, it is possible to accurately grasp the progression of the chord with respect to the BGM in which the same melody is repeatedly reproduced.

  When the chord is changed from the current beat (S2157: Yes), an incoming sound reproduction start command with the pitch as the root sound of the chord is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2159), and the process proceeds to S2166. The root sound of a chord is a basic sound in a chord. Through the processing of S2159, the incoming sound having the pitch as the root sound of the chord is output from the audio output device 226. If a pitch sound other than the root sound of the chord is output at the timing of the beat when the BGM chord is changed, the player recognizes the sound as a sound that deviates from the chord, and the player feels uncomfortable. There is a risk of causing. On the other hand, by making the incoming sound whose pitch is the root sound, the player can hear the incoming sound as a sound that matches the changed code. Therefore, it is possible to make a sound that is comfortable for the player to listen to.

  As a result of the processing in S2157, if the chord is not changed at the current beat (S2157: No), it is then determined whether or not the elapsed sound pronunciation flag 223j is on (S2160). As a result, if the elapsed sound pronunciation flag 223j is off (S2160: No), the chord information at the current beat is read from the ROM 222, and the pitch used as the pitch of one winning sound from the constituent sounds constituting the chord is read. Is selected (S2161), an instruction to start playing a winning sound with the selected constituent sound as the pitch is set in the sound output LSI (S2162), and the process proceeds to S2166.

  As a result, a winning sound whose pitch is the constituent sound of the chord is output from the sound output device 226. In addition, the incoming sound is not only pronounced according to the beat of the time-saving BGM, but is also pronounced at a pitch that matches the chord of the time-saving BGM at that time. Therefore, since the chord is composed of the incoming sound and the time-saving BGM, it is possible to make the player listen to a more pleasant sound. In addition, when a ball enters the first ball slot 64, a melody accompanied by a time-saving BGM can be formed by the ball pitch sound and can be heard by the player. In addition, the melody differs depending on the timing and number of balls entered. Therefore, the player can be entertained by various melodies that are played by the incoming sound from time to time.

  As a result of the processing of S2160, when it is determined that the elapsed sound sound generation flag 223j is on (S2160: Yes), it is determined that the incoming sound with the elapsed sound as the pitch is generated at the timing of the last beat. Therefore, at the timing of the beat here, an incoming pitch sound having a pitch corresponding to the constituent sound corresponding to the generated progressing sound is generated. Specifically, the pitch reproduced at the previous beat is read from the pitch information memory 223k (S2163), and the sound to be reproduced corresponding to the pitch reproduced at the previous beat for the current BGM code. High is selected from the pitch setting table 222c at the time of elapsed sound reproduction (S2164). Then, a winning sound reproduction start command having the selected pitch is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2165), and the process proceeds to S2166.

  Here, when a chord at a beat of a certain BGM is “C” and an incoming sound having a pitch of the constituent sound “mi” is generated at that time, the pitch “mi” is stored in the pitch information memory. It is stored in 223k. When the incoming sound having the pitch of the elapsed sound of the chord “C” is generated at the timing of the subsequent beat of the BGM, the pitch of the incoming sound generated at the immediately preceding beat is read from the pitch information memory 223k ( In this example, the pitch of the elapsed sound corresponding to the constituent sound “mi” in the code “C” is specified from the elapsed sound reproduction pitch setting table 222c. In the present embodiment, “Fa” is specified as the pitch of the elapsed sound, and the incoming sound with the elapsed sound “Fa” as the pitch is generated at the timing of the back beat.

  When the incoming sound having the pitch of the constituent sound of the chord “C” is generated at the timing of the next BGM beat following the back beat (that is, when the elapsed sound sound generation flag 223j is on), From the pitch information memory 223k, the pitch of the incoming pitch sound generated at the immediately preceding beat is read (in this example, “mi”), and the configuration at the next beat corresponding to the constituent tone “mi” in the chord “C” The pitch of the sound is specified from the pitch setting table 222c at the time of elapsed sound reproduction. In the present embodiment, “So” is specified as the pitch of the constituent sound at the next beat, and the incoming sound with the constituent sound “So” as the pitch is generated at the timing of the next beat.

  As a result, in each of the first BGM beat, the subsequent back beat, and the subsequent beat, the incoming sounds are generated in the order of “Mi”, “Fa”, and “So” corresponding to the BGM code “C”. Therefore, when the incoming sound with the elapsed sound as the pitch is generated in the back beat between the beats where the incoming sound that generates the pitch of the chord is generated, the strange passage of the pitch It is possible to suppress the sound from being generated or the occurrence of a pitch deviating from the elapsed sound generated in the back beat in the beat after the back beat. Therefore, a beautiful melody can be played when the incoming sound is pronounced while inserting the elapsed sound.

  In the process of S2166, the pitch reproduced as the winning sound is stored in the pitch information memory 223k by the processes of S2159, S2162, and S2165 (S2166). Then, since one entrance sound for the entrance to the first entrance 64 is sounded, the start winning counter 223d is decremented by 1 (S2167). Thereafter, the elapsed sound sound generation flag 223j is set to OFF (S2168), and the start winning sound output process is terminated.

  As a result of the processing of S2156, when the value of the start winning counter 223d is 0 (S2156: Yes), since the entrance into the first entrance 64 is not stocked, the elapsed sound generation flag 223j is turned off ( S2168), the start winning sound output processing is terminated.

  As a result of the processing of S2155, when the value of the timer counter 223h is not the BGM beat period T (S2156: No), then, referring to FIG. 30, the value of the timer counter 223h is half of the BGM beat period. It is determined whether or not T / 2 (S2169). As a result, if the value of the timer counter 223h is not T / 2 (S2169: No), the start winning sound output process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the timer counter 223h is T / 2 (S2169: Yes), it is the timing of the back beat of the BGM being played back, and then the start winning counter 223d is greater than 1 and the beat immediately before It is determined whether or not the incoming sound is pronounced (S2170).

  When the start winning counter 223d is 1 or less, or when the incoming pitch sound is not pronounced at the immediately preceding beat (S2170: No), the start winning sound output processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the start winning counter 223d is larger than 1 and a pitching sound is generated at the previous beat (S2170: Yes), then the code information of the previous beat and the code information of the next beat are stored in the ROM 222. (S2171), it is determined whether the code information of the previous beat and the code information of the next beat match (S2172).

  As a result, when the chord information of the previous beat matches the chord information of the next beat (S2172: Yes), the pitch of the incoming sound reproduced at the previous beat is read from the pitch information memory 223k (S2173). For the current chord, the pitch to be played back corresponding to the pitch played back at the previous beat is selected from the elapsed tone playback pitch setting table 222c (S2174). Then, a winning sound reproduction start command with the selected pitch is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2175). As a result, a winning sound having a pitch selected from the elapsed sound playback pitch setting table 222c is output from the audio output device 226 at the timing of the back beat of the BGM.

  Here, the pitch of the incoming sound output at the timing of the BGM beat is selected by the pitch setting table 222c for the elapsed sound reproduction at the timing of the back beat of the BGM, whereas it is the constituent sound of the chord. The pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord. Thereby, when the entrance to the 1st entrance 64 continues, not only the standard sound of a chord but the back beat of BGM is used, and an entrance sound is pronounced, inserting the passage sound of a chord. So you can play more complex melodies with incoming sounds. Therefore, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  Further, the pitch of the incoming sound that is generated by the BGM back beat is determined based on the pitch of the incoming sound that is generated by the previous beat by the elapsed sound reproduction pitch setting table 222c. The pitch of the incoming pitch sound that is pronounced by the beat is also determined. As a result, when the incoming sound with the elapsed sound as the pitch is generated in the back beat between the beats at which the incoming sounds that generate the pitch of the chord are generated, It is possible to suppress the passage sound from being generated or the occurrence of a pitch deviating from the passage sound generated from the back beat in the beat after the back beat. Therefore, a beautiful melody can be played when the incoming sound is pronounced while inserting the elapsed sound.

  Next, the elapsed sound sound generation flag 223j indicating that the elapsed sound has been generated is set to ON (S2176). Since the incoming sound corresponding to the incoming sound is generated, the value of the start winning counter 223d is decremented by 1 (S2179). ), The start winning sound output process is terminated.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S2172, if the chord information of the previous beat and the chord information of the next beat do not match (S2172: No), the current BGM code information is read from the ROM 222, and the constituent sounds constituting the chord Then, the pitch of one incoming sound is selected (S2177), and a reproduction start instruction for the incoming sound with the selected constituent sound as the pitch is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2178). If the chord progress sound is output here, the chord is changed at the next beat, so the progress sound becomes a floating sound, and the player can listen to a strange melody. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the chord information of the previous beat and the next beat does not match by the processing of S2177 and S2178, the incoming sound having the pitch of the constituent sound of the chord in the BGM back beat Since the sound is output from the audio output device 226, it is possible to make the player listen to a beautiful melody according to the chord.

  After the processing of S2178, 1 is subtracted from the value of the start winning counter 223d (S2179), and the start winning sound output processing is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 31 and FIG. 32, the sounding timing of the incoming sound when the start winning sound output process is executed will be described. First, FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the sounding timing of the incoming sound when one sphere enters the first entrance 64 during one BGM beat. As shown in FIG. 31, in this case, a ball that has entered the first entrance 64 in the middle of a BGM beat is stocked, and an incoming sound is produced at the timing of the BGM beat. At this time, at the timing of the first beat when the chord is changed, the incoming sound with the pitch of the root sound (“do” in the example of FIG. 31) of the chord (“C” in the example of FIG. 31) is generated. After that, unless the chord is changed, the incoming sound is generated with the pitch of the constituent sound of the chord (in the example of FIG. 31, “do”, “mi”, “so”).

  In this way, the incoming sound is pronounced in time with the beat of the time-saving BGM, so a sound with a rhythmic feeling is output. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically on the rhythm of the time-saving BGM, so that the player's feelings about the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in games can be enhanced.

  Further, when the incoming sound is generated, the pitch of the incoming sound is determined based on the time-saving BGM code at the sound generation timing. Specifically, one pitch is selected from the pitches of the constituent sounds constituting the chord as the pitch of the incoming sound. As a result, the incoming sound is not only pronounced in time with the beat of the time-saving BGM, but is also produced with a pitch that matches the chord of the time-saving BGM at that time. Therefore, since the chord is composed of the incoming sound and the time-saving BGM, it is possible to make the player listen to a more pleasant sound.

  Next, FIG. 32A is a diagram showing the sounding timing of the incoming sound when three spheres enter the first entrance 64 during one BGM beat, and FIG. ), Two balls enter the first entrance 64 during one beat of BGM, and one more ball enters the first entrance 64 until the next back beat. FIG. 32 (c) is a diagram illustrating the sound generation timing of the incoming sound when entering the ball. FIG. 32 (c) shows that one ball enters the first entrance 64 during one beat of the BGM, It is a figure explaining the sounding timing of the incoming sound when two spheres enter the first entrance 64 until the next back beat.

  In the case of FIGS. 32A to 32C, all correspond to one of the balls at the timing of the beat following the first beat when one to three balls have entered the first entrance 64. The incoming sound is generated with the pitch of the constituent sound of the chord at the timing of the beat. Next, at the timing of the back beat of the BGM, there are two or more balls entering the first entrance 64 in the stock where no incoming sound is produced, and the incoming sound is produced at the immediately preceding beat. On the condition that it is done, the incoming sound is pronounced. That is, in the examples shown in FIGS. 32A to 32C, the incoming ball sound is generated with the BGM back beat. Then, the incoming sound is further generated at the timing of the next beat of the back beat.

  Here, as a condition for generating the incoming sound at the timing of the back beat of the BGM, there are two or more incoming balls to the first entrance 64 in the stock where the incoming sound is not generated. And, the condition that the incoming sound was pronounced at the last beat was that the incoming sound was pronounced continuously at the previous beat, the current back beat, and the next beat. is there. Thereby, when the entrance to the first entrance 64 is continuously performed, not only the timing of the beat but also the previous beat, the current back beat, and the next beat continuously. By making the incoming sound pronounced, more diverse rhythms can be engraved with the incoming sound. In addition, it is possible to suppress the impression that the rhythm of the incoming sound does not become BGM by not generating the incoming sound with the beat and generating the incoming sound with the back beat.

  In addition, an incoming sound with the pitch of the chord component sound is generated in two beats, and an incoming sound with the pitch of the elapsed sound of the chord constituent sound is generated in the back beat between these two beats. Pronounced. As a result, the incoming sound is pronounced while inserting the incoming sound with the elapsed sound as the pitch between the incoming sounds with the pitch of the constituent sounds of the BGM chords while matching the rhythm of the BGM. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to give variations to the melody based on the incoming sound accompanied by the time-saving BGM. Therefore, the melody due to the incoming sound does not become monotonous, and voice output that does not bore the player can be performed.

  In the sound editing / output process (see FIG. 27), the details of the frame button operation sound output process (S2137) executed when an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is performed. This is almost the same as the sound output process (see FIGS. 29 and 30). Specifically, the start winning counter 223d used in the start winning sound output process is replaced with a frame button operation frequency counter 223f, and the sound to be generated is replaced with the operation sound from the winning sound. Become. By executing the frame button operation sound output processing, the same operational effects as the winning sound output by the start winning sound output processing can be achieved in the operation sound.

  In particular, since the operation sound is pronounced in time with the beat of the BGM, a sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, the player can perform a game such as operating the frame button 22 rhythmically on the BGM rhythm, so that the player's feelings about the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in games can be enhanced.

  Further, when an operation sound is generated, the pitch of the operation sound is determined based on the BGM code at the sound generation timing. Therefore, by operating the frame button 22, a melody based on the operation sound is played, so that it is possible to perform voice output that does not bore the player.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU 231 is broadly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt signal detected by the MPU 231. There is a V-interrupt process executed in the case of The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the image controller 237 to the MPU 231. The image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for completing the image drawing process for one frame. To do.

  The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  In this main process, an initial setting process is executed (S2401). Specifically, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 236 is performed. Various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation has started normally.

  After the processing of S2401, interrupt permission is set (S2402). Thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2402, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2501), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by a command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32B, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 32B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 15) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In the V interrupt process, first, a command determination process (S2602) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2603) is executed. In the command determination process (S2602), the contents of the command stored in the command buffer area are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. For example, when a display variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer area, a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern type indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the detailed variation pattern is supported. The display data table for change is read from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of the change effect, there is a high possibility that the display change pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area in 20 milliseconds. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at a time, it is possible to quickly grasp the aspect such as the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and to produce the effect image corresponding to the aspect. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2603), the address specified by the pointer 233c is defined based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b by the command determination process (S2602). According to the drawn contents, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specifically specified.

  Furthermore, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233a. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process (S2603) is executed, a task process is then executed (S2604). In this task process, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting process (S2603). In addition to specifying, for each sprite, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2605). In this drawing process, the drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated from the types of various sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2604). Transmit to the image controller 237. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2606). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the processing of S2606, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of a display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (other than 15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, front / rear out of reach, out of front / rear out) The stop type table corresponding to the reach (completely missed) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  Next, details of the above-described command determination process (S2602), which is one process of the V interrupt process, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing. The command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114.

  In this command determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2701). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2701: No), the command determination process is terminated. Return to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2603) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2702), and then The command types of all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area are analyzed (S2703).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display reserved ball number command among the unprocessed commands (S2704). If there is a display reserved ball number command (S2704: Yes), the held ball number command processing is performed. Is executed (S2705), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 36A, details of the reserved ball number command processing (S2705) will be described. FIG. 36A is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command processing. This reserved ball number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display reserved ball number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the reserved ball number command processing, first, the new reserved ball number command flag is turned on (S2801). The new reserved ball number command flag is a flag for notifying the display setting process (S2603) that the display reserved ball number command has been processed in the ON state. Next, the number of reserved balls included in the displayed reserved ball number command is acquired (S2802).

  In the processing of S2802, if two or more display reserved ball number commands are stored in the command buffer area, the held ball number information is acquired from the last stored display ball number command. Thereby, the newest number of reserved balls can be acquired.

  Then, among the number determination flags provided for each number of reserved balls, the number determination flag corresponding to the number of reserved balls acquired in the processing of S2802 is turned on, and the number determination flags corresponding to other numbers of reserved balls are turned off. (S2803), the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the new reserved ball number command flag is on, by referring to the number determination flag, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of held balls corresponding to the number determination flag set to ON is a small area. The reserved image data is expanded so as to be displayed on Ds1.

  Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined in the processing of S2704 that there is no display pending ball number command (S2704: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display confirmation command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display confirmation command (S2706: Yes), the confirmation command process is executed (S2707), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, the details of the confirmation command process (S2707) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36B is a flowchart showing the confirmation command process. This confirmation command process executes a process corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the confirmation command process (S2707), the confirmation command flag is set to ON (S2811), and this process ends. The confirmation command flag is a flag for notifying the display setting process (S2603) that the display confirmation command has been received in the ON state. In the display setting process, the state of the confirmed command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display setting process is executed so that the display of the confirmed display effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. . In addition, after processing the setting of the display of the variable effect, if the confirmed command flag does not turn on even after the effect time set for the variable effect has elapsed, the restart effect (the third symbol is swung up and down) The display setting process is executed so that the (designation) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the timing of the beat of BGM, it appears as if the change effect is stopped and displayed. This fake display defines the fluctuation table display data table for a time shorter than the original fluctuation time so that the fluctuation effect is stopped and displayed at the beat timing of the BGM by the fluctuation display data table described later. This is realized. In this embodiment, after that, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the original fixed display timing is reached, and the original fluctuation time is secured. Thereby, the player can be regarded as having the variation effect stopped along the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can play the game in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM.

  Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined in the processing of S2706 that there is no display confirmation command (S2706: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display demo command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a display demonstration command (S2708) (S2708: Yes), the demonstration command processing is executed (S2709), and the processing returns to S2701.

  Here, the details of the demo command process (S2709) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36C is a flowchart showing the demo command process. This demo command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display demo command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the demonstration command processing (S2709), first, a demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is selected from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2821). Next, null data is written into the additional data table buffer 233b to clear the contents (S2822).

  Next, time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the time counter 233e (S2823), and the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2824). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to OFF, the demonstration display flag is set to ON, and the confirmation display flag is set to OFF (S2825), and the process returns to the command determination process. The demonstration display flag is a flag indicating that a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state. The confirmed display flag is a flag indicating that the confirmed display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state.

  By executing this demo command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the process of S2824, the display data table for demonstration set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S2821 is updated. Then, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. In the display setting process, the time of the demonstration effect defined in the display data table for demonstration is counted using the time counter 233e in which the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set by the process of S2823, and the process of S2825 is performed. Based on the state of the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag set by the above, when it is determined that the demonstration effect in the display data table for demonstration is ended by the timing of the display setting control time counter 233e, the effect to be displayed next Then, control is performed so that the demonstration effect is displayed again.

  Further, when both the confirmation command and the demo command are stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, the above-described confirmation command process (S2707) is executed first, and the confirmation command flag is turned on. Then, the demo command process (S2709) is executed, and the confirmed command flag is turned off by the process of S2825.

  Thereby, in such a case, the demonstration effect is displayed without performing the final display effect. Main controller 110 is configured to transmit a demo command if it does not come to the start timing of the changing effect after a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed after transmitting the confirmation command. When the execution of the command determination process is started, it is impossible for both the confirmed command and the demo command to be stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, when these commands are all stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, there is a high possibility that the command transmission / reception is not normally performed.

  In such a case, since the display control device 114 gives priority to the demonstration effect that is not directly related to the game and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display it on the third symbol display device 81, the wrong fixed display effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, it is possible to suppress the player from misunderstanding the game result. In addition, since the demonstration effect is started without performing the final display effect, the player can easily recognize that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, the player can immediately call a hall related person to request a countermeasure.

  Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined in the process of SS2708 that there is no display demo command (S2708: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation start command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display variation start command (S2710) (S2710: Yes), the variation start command process is executed (S2711), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, the details of the change start command process (S2711) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37A is a flowchart showing the change start command process. This variation start command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation start command received from the sound lamp control device 113. The display variation start command is a command transmitted to the display control device 114 when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command and a stop type command instructing variation start from the main control device 110. . The display control device 114 starts the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display variation start command from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation start command process, first, a restart display data table corresponding to the restart effect is selected from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2826). Next, null data is written into the additional data table buffer 233b to clear the contents (S2827).

  Next, time data corresponding to the restart effect is set in the time counter 233e (S2828), and the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2829). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to OFF, the demonstration display flag is set to OFF, and the confirmation display flag is set to OFF (S2830), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In this way, the display control device 114 receives the display variation start command, and first displays a restart effect on the third symbol display device 81. That is, when the start of the variation effect is determined by the main control device 110, immediately after the start of the variation effect, the third symbol display device 81 displays the third symbol up and down. Thereby, the change production by the 3rd design is started.

  On the other hand, after transmitting the display variation start command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits the display variation pattern command to the display control device 114 in accordance with the timing of the BGM beat being reproduced. Upon receiving these display variation pattern commands, the display control device 114 starts execution of the variation effect according to the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command, and starts high-speed variation of the third symbol. Thereby, it can be made to appear to the player that the variation effect of the 3rd design was started at the timing of the beat of BGM. Therefore, the player can be made to understand that the variation effect is started in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can play the game in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM.

  If the start of the changing effect is determined by the main control device 110 by setting the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag to OFF by the processing of S2830, the demonstration effect or the confirmed display effect being displayed is replaced. Thus, the variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when both the confirmation command and the display variation start command are stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, the above-described confirmation command process (S2707) is executed first, and the confirmation command flag Is set to ON, then, the fluctuation start command process (S2711) is executed, and the confirmed command flag is turned OFF by the process of S2830.

  Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined in step S2710 that there is no display variation start command (S2710: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display variation pattern command (S2712: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed (S2713), and the processing returns to S2701.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S2713) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37B is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is extracted (S2831). Next, for the extracted details, the display data table for change corresponding to the change pattern is read from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2832).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2832, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. The table is set in the display data table buffer 233a.

  If the display data table for change corresponding to the change pattern having a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233a, the change effect having the change time shorter than the set display data table is actually controlled by the main control. When instructed by the device 110, the main controller 110 displays a confirmation command (display confirmation command) while displaying the variation effect according to the set variation display data table on the third symbol display device 81. ) Is received, and the changing third symbol is suddenly stopped and displayed, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table for change corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233a, the display data table is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when a variation effect having a variation time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233a is completed, a confirmation command from the main controller 110 is obtained. Until the display confirmation command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed, so that the player visually recognizes the restart effect as part of the variable effect. Until the stop display of the 3rd symbol is confirmed, the variation of the 3rd symbol in the 3rd symbol display device 81 can be continuously observed without a sense of incongruity.

  Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the additional data table buffer 233b (S2833). Next, time data representing the time for which display is controlled by the display data table for change set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S2832 is set in the time counter 233e (S2834). The pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2835), and the confirmation command flag, the demonstration display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to OFF (S2836). Then, the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S2832 while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the processing of S2835. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified.

  Further, in the display setting process, using the time counter 233e in which the variation time data is set by the processing of S2834, the variation effect time defined in the variation display data table is counted, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is measured. If it is determined that the confirmation command has been completed, a confirmation display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 is received. If the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is not received after the end of the variation effect, the display setting is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, in this embodiment, as described above, at the timing of the beat of BGM, it appears as if the variation effect is stopped and displayed, and this appearance is displayed by the display data table for variation. This is realized by defining the display data table for change for a time shorter than the original change time so that the change effect is stopped and displayed at the timing of the beat. In the present embodiment, after the apparent change effect stop display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the change table display data table, the restart effect is displayed until the original fixed display timing is reached. To ensure the original fluctuation time. Thereby, the player can be regarded as having the variation effect stopped along the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can play the game in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM.

  Also, if both the display confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command is given priority, the display variation command Since the variation effect accompanying the pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command. In contrast, in this command determination process, the presence / absence of the display confirmation command is determined first, so the confirmation command process corresponding to the display confirmation command is always executed first. The process corresponding to the change pattern command for use is executed later, and the fixed command flag set by the display fixed command can be set to off by overwriting as in the process of S2836. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display confirmation command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if priority is given to the processing corresponding to the display demo command, Since the variation effect accompanying the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command determination process, the presence / absence of the display demo command is determined first, so the demo command process corresponding to the display demo command is always executed first. The process corresponding to the change pattern command for execution is executed later, and the display data table for demonstration set in the display data table buffer 233a by the display demonstration command is rewritten to the display data table for change by overwriting as in the process of S2832. Can do. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demo command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Furthermore, both the display variation start command and the display variation pattern command may be stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands. This is a case where the fluctuation start timing determined by the main controller 110 and the timing of the BGM beat being played are aligned. In this case, if priority is given to the processing corresponding to the display variation start command, the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command is not performed, and it is performed until the restart effect associated with the display variation start command is confirmed and displayed. End up.

  On the other hand, in this command determination process, the presence / absence of the display variation start command is determined first, so that the demo command process corresponding to the display variation start command is always executed first. The processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed later, and the display data table for variation is overwritten by overwriting the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the display variation start command as in the processing of S2832. Can be rewritten. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display variation start command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command in the processing of S2712 (S2712: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display stop type command (S2714: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2715), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2715) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type information (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, 15R normal big hit, front / rear reach, reach other than front / rear reach, complete miss, special stop symbol) ) Is determined (S2841), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 34B) is executed. Thus, the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2842).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2842 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S2843), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the display data table for change, the processing of S2842 is performed as type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the drawing content corresponding to the address after the predetermined time. The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by is described. In the task process (S2604), after the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2842 is identified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set in S2843, and the identification is performed. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Then, the address of the character storage area 234a in which image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. There is also the possibility of being interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2841, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S2842. In such a case, the stop type table may be determined on the assumption that the stop type is a special stop symbol even when the stop type is completely off.

  Here, if a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set, the jackpot stop symbol will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is actually off. The player may misunderstand that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit, which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as shown in this embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a big hit, the stop symbol of complete detachment is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. However, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot state, the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command in the processing of S2714 (S2714: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2722), and processing of S2701 Return to.

  In the process of S2701, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes). ), The processing of S2702 to S2722 is executed again. Then, the processes in S2701 to S2722 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S2701 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2701: No) ), The command determination process is terminated.

  Next, the details of the display setting process (S2603), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40 are flowcharts showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 39, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2901), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2901: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S2902 to S2904 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2905. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S2901: YES), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S2902), S2903 By each process of S2904, a process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S2903, it is determined whether or not the new reserved ball number command flag is ON (S2903). If the new reserved ball number command flag is ON (S2903: Yes), the display is performed in the previous command determination process. It is determined that the reserved ball number command has been processed, and the reserved image setting process is executed (S2904).

  Here, the details of the hold image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the hold image setting process. In the reserved image setting process, the number of reserved balls for the number of reserved balls notified from the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the processing of the number of reserved balls for display. Therefore, it is a process for developing the image data.

  In the reserved image setting process, first, the number determination flag is referred to, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number determination flag set to ON is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4). The reserved image data to be displayed in () is expanded (S2951). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the reserved image is specified based on the developed reserved image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the reserved image setting process, after the process of S2951, the new reserved ball number command is set to OFF (S2952), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to FIG. 39, after the hold image setting process (S2904) or in the process of S2903, if it is determined that the new hold ball number command flag is not on, that is, is off (S2903: No), then , The process proceeds to S2905.

  In S2905, pointer update processing is executed (S2905). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing is performed by updating the pointer 233c that designates an address at which the corresponding drawing content is to be acquired from the display data table and the additional data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. It is a process to perform.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233c (S2981). That is, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233c is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233a, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233c by the processing of S2981, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233c is End information. Is discriminated (S2982). As a result, if it is End information (S2982: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, the pointer 233c has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is a demonstration display data table or a restart display data table (S2983), and the demonstration display data table or the restart display data is determined. If it is a table (S2983: Yes), the pointer 233c is set to 1 (S2984), and further corresponds to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a. The time data is set in the time counter 233e (S2985), and the process proceeds to S2987. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table, so that the demonstration effect or the restart effect is repeated on the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2983, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is neither the display data table for demonstration nor the restart display data table (S2983: No), the pointer 233c The value is subtracted by 1 (S2986), and the process proceeds to S2987. Thereby, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table and the restart display data table, for example, a display data table for change or a fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a. Since the drawing content of the previous address in which End information is written is always developed, the third image display device 81 displays the last image specified by the display data table in a stopped state. be able to.

  As a result of the processing of S2982, when it is determined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a that the data at the address indicated by the pointer 233c updated by the processing of S2981 is not End information (S2982: No) ), The process of S2983 to S2986 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2987.

  In the process of S2987, it is determined whether or not the confirmed command flag is on (S2987). If the confirmed command flag is not on but off (S2987: No), the pointer update process is terminated and display setting is completed. Return to processing. On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2987: Yes), it means that a confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, so that the display data table buffer The value of the pointer 233c is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where End information is stored in the display data buffer set to 233a (S2988), and the value of the time counter is set to 1. (S2989), the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, when the confirmation command is received, the display setting process can expand the drawing content defined at the end of the set display data table and control the start of the confirmation display effect.

  Returning to FIG. 39, after the pointer update process (S2905), the pointer 233c updated by the pointer update process is displayed from the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. The contents of drawing at the address to be expanded are developed (S2906). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S2906 together with the pending image previously expanded, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined. When Null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. When the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared with null data, the null data is always expanded from the additional data table buffer 233b.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233e (S2911), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233e after the subtraction is 0 or less (S2912). If the value of the time counter 233e is 1 or more (S2912: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233e is 0 or less (S2912: Yes), it means that the effect time of the production corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a has passed. At this time, if the display data table for change is set in the display data table buffer 233a, a confirmation command (display confirmation command for display) is sent from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 at the end of the effect. ) Should be transmitted, so in the subsequent processing of S2913, it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed command flag is on (S2913).

  As a result, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2913: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (confirmation command for display) has been received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. The mode of the fixed display effect according to the stop symbol indicated by the symbol determination flag is determined, the fixed display data table of the mode is set in the display data table buffer 233a, and Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b. The contents are cleared (S2914). Next, time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display is set in the time counter 233e (S2915), and the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2916). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to OFF (S2917), and after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2918), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly used as the work RAM 233. (S2919), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when a display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 233a or the like, a confirmation command (confirmation for display) is sent from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 at the end of the effect. When the command) is received, the drawing content can be set so that the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S2919 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, since the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is started from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, the variation based on the data table starts in the variation display data table. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before is determined until a predetermined time elapses from this. In the task process (S2604), the stop symbol in the previous variation effect is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S2919 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation. And the 3rd symbol which should be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information prescribed | regulated to the above-mentioned display data for a fluctuation | variation to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is off instead of on in the process of S2913 (S2913: No), the process proceeds to S2920 shown in FIG. 40, and it is determined whether or not the confirmation display flag is on (S2920). ). If the confirmed display flag is on (S2920: Yes), the result of determination in the process of S2912 (S2912: Yes) means that the confirmed display effect has ended, so the confirmed display flag is set to off. Later (S2921), the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2922), and then the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the data display is set in the time counter 233e (S2923). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2924), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2925), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  By this, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demonstration effect command indicating the start of the demonstration effect is not received by the end of the final display effect, automatically, The drawing content can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  It should be noted that the branch condition of S2920: Yes is when the confirmed display effect is being performed. In this case, the content of the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared by the process of S2914. Therefore, in the process of S2922, the clear process of those data table buffers is omitted. Thereby, the processing load in the MPU 231 can be reduced.

  In the process of S2920, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S2920: No), it is then determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S2926). If the demonstration display flag is on (S2926: Yes), the result of determination in the processing of S2912 (S2912: Yes) means that the demonstration effect has ended. Return to interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2926, when the demonstration display flag is not on but off (S2926: No), the result of the determination in the process of S2912 (S2912: Yes) means that the changing effect has ended. Therefore, the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, and Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b to clear the contents (S2929). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the time counter 233e (S2930), the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2931), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Here, in this embodiment, the variation table display data table is defined by a time shorter than the original variation time so that the variation effect is apparently stopped and displayed at the beat timing of the BGM by the variation display data table. To do. Then, after the apparent stop display, the restart display data table is set by the processing of S2929, and the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the original fixed display timing is reached. Ensure variable time. Thereby, the player can be regarded as having the variation effect stopped along the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can play the game in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM.

  Further, in the display control device 114, even if a predetermined time elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect, a confirmation command (from the main control device 110 is transmitted via the audio lamp control device 113). When the display confirmation command is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the restart effect is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an image in which the third symbol is vibrated. When it is visually recognized that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the change of the stop is displayed, it can be recognized that the stop symbol is not fixed at that time.

  In addition, after the last drawing content prescribed | regulated by the restart display data table is expand | deployed, the drawing content is expand | deployed again from the head of the restart display data table by the above-mentioned pointer update process. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 or a new display variation pattern command is received. Here, the restart effect is to display the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in such a manner that the third symbol is vibrated (oscillated) around a predetermined position. In the restart display data table, the third symbol is displayed. Only the drawing contents necessary to display the screen at least once are defined. Then, by repeatedly expanding the drawing contents from the top of the restart display data table, a restart effect in which the third symbol is repeatedly vibrated is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this way, the restart effect is an effect that causes the 3rd symbol display device 81 to vibrate and display the 3rd symbol, so that the 3rd symbol is swung at least once in the restart display data table. Since it is only necessary to store the drawing contents necessary for display, the capacity required for storing the restart display data table can be reduced.

  If a display confirmation command is received from the audio lamp controller 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2914 shown in FIG. 39 is performed, and the display data table buffer is displayed. A final display data table is set in 233a. Thus, even during the restart effect, the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol discrimination flag in accordance with the reception of the display confirmation command, and the final symbol display device 81 displays the final display effect. Can be displayed.

  Further, when a display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2832 in FIG. A variation display data table is set in the data table buffer 233a, and a variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If a display demonstration command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2821 in FIG. 36C is performed, and the display data is displayed. A display data table for demonstration is set in the table buffer 233a, and a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The restart effect is an effect that is displayed when a confirmation command (display confirmation command) to be received from the main control device 110 is not received after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable effect. Therefore, there is a possibility that the confirmation command is not received while the restart effect is displayed due to the influence of noise or malfunction. On the other hand, in this embodiment, if the display variation pattern command or the display demo command is received during the restart effect, the effect corresponding to the command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Various effects in the third symbol display device 81 can be performed in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the details of the above-described drawing process (S2605), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2604) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), the drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated (S3001). That is, in the process of S3001, the address of the character storage area 234a in which image data of the sprite is stored is specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2604). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As the drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the address of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing target buffer information specified by a drawing target buffer flag (not shown) are transmitted to the image controller (S3002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag is 0, the first frame buffer provided in the video RAM 236 as drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to expand the drawn image. When the drawing target buffer flag is 0, the second frame buffer provided in the video RAM as drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to expand the drawn image.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. To send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is developed, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process in S3002, the drawing target buffer flag is updated (S3003). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” if the value is “0” and setting it to “0” if it is “1”. Is called. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer of the video RAM 236 every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 34B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read, and image rendering is performed. When the processing and the display processing are executed, the second frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. A first frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer from which information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. . Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer. Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read are alternately designated for the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer every 20 milliseconds. As a result, the image display process for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while the image drawing process for one frame is being performed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, when a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is detected, the player is notified that there is a ball. The incoming sound is output in accordance with the timing of BGM beats and back beats. In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated, an operation sound for notifying the player that the operation has been performed is output in accordance with the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat.

  As a result, the incoming sound and the operation sound are pronounced in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that a sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically on the BGM rhythm, so that the player's feelings about the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in games can be enhanced.

  Also, when sounding an incoming sound or an operation sound, the pitch of the incoming sound or the operation sound is determined using the constituent sound or elapsed sound of the BGM chord (chord) at the sounding timing. As a result, the incoming sound and the operation sound are not only pronounced according to the beat of the BGM, but are also pronounced at a pitch that matches the BGM chord at that time. Therefore, a melody accompanied by BGM can be composed of an incoming sound or an operation sound and can be heard by the player. In addition, the melody differs depending on the timing of entering and operating, the number of entering and the number of operations. Therefore, the player can be entertained by various melodies that are played by the incoming sound or the operation sound depending on the time.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 performs a display that vibrates the third symbol up and down from the original timing of the start of fluctuation to the timing of the beat of BGM. (Design shaking period). Then, when the first BGM beat timing comes from the original variation start timing, reading of the data table corresponding to the detailed variation pattern determined for the variation effect is started at that timing. In the 3 symbol display device 81, the high speed fluctuation of the 3rd symbol is started.

  Here, a display pattern is set in advance so that display of various effect images during the changing effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed in accordance with the beat of the BGM. Further, the output from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display of the effect image and the lighting / flashing of the lamp of the lamp display device 227 are defined in the data table, and these are also adjusted in accordance with the beat of the BGM. Done.

  Further, in the variation effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the 3rd symbol is once stopped and displayed at the timing of the beat of the BGM just before the original confirmation display is performed. The sound output device 226 generates a stop sound to be expressed. Thereafter, until the original confirmed display timing is reached, the 3rd symbol display device 81 performs a display of vibrating the third symbol up and down (design fluctuation period), and the 3rd symbol is finally displayed at the original confirmed display timing.

  As described above, the fluctuation effect is originally started irrespective of the beat of the BGM and is displayed in a definite manner, but in this embodiment, high-speed fluctuation is started in accordance with the timing of the beat, and once Stop display. Then, until the high-speed fluctuation starts from the original fluctuation start timing, and until the original fixed display timing comes after the stop display is performed, a display that vibrates the third symbol up and down is used as the symbol fluctuation period. Do.

  Thereby, in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, a change production is started according to the beat of BGM, and it can show to a player as if the stop display was performed. In addition, various effect images displayed during the change effect can be displayed in accordance with the beat of the BGM, and further, the output of the sound according to the change effect, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the second The operation of the single accessory 87 can also be performed in accordance with the beat of the BGM. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a sense that the variation effect is also performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, it is possible to perform a rhythmic game and improve the interest of the player.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the BGM change timing, for example, the timing for starting playback of the BGM that is output when a big win is notified and the big hit effect BGM that is output during the big win effect Once the BGM is changed, such as at the timing of starting or ending playback, the BGM will continue to play regardless of the start and stop of the fluctuating effect, The case where the stop display (temporary stop of the third symbol) is executed at the timing of the beat of BGM has been described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a case will be described in which BGM reproduction is started in accordance with the start of the variation effect, and BGM reproduction is terminated in accordance with the end of the variation effect.

  In the second embodiment, BGM sound reproduction start information and sound reproduction end information corresponding to the variation effect are defined in a data table set when a detailed variation pattern is determined. Specifically, the BGM sound reproduction start information is defined in the first address (0001H) of the data table. Further, the BGM sound reproduction end information is defined in the data table in association with an address corresponding to the time when the variation effect by the detailed variation pattern ends. Also, at the address where the BGM sound reproduction end information is defined, stop sound reproduction information indicating that the change effect has been stopped is also defined.

  By referring to this data table, the MPU 221 starts playback of the BGM at the start of the variation effect, ends playback of the BGM at the end of the variation effect, and also generates a stop sound for the variation effect. Will be.

  Here, in the second embodiment, the variation time is defined so that the variation effect ends at the beat timing of the BGM. Therefore, the variation effect ends at the timing of the beat of BGM, and the stop sound of the variation effect is also sounded at the timing of the beat of BGM. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variation effect is stopped together with the rhythm of BGM. Therefore, since the variation effect can be ended rhythmically, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the variable display process (S1913), the sound editing / output process (S1909), the start winning sound output process (S2133), and the frame button operation which are executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that a part of the on-output process is different. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, other various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and display Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 44, the fluctuation | variation display process (S1913) performed by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the change display process (S1913).

  In this variation display processing, first, as in the first embodiment, after executing the processing of S2101 to S2104, for display, a detailed variation pattern determined in the processing of S2104 is notified to the display control device 114. A variation pattern command is generated and set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3501). Further, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop symbol acquired by the processing of S2103 is generated and set to transmit the command to the display control device 114 (S3502).

  Here, the set display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S1902) executed later in the main process (see FIG. 24). Is done.

  That is, in the first embodiment, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command generated when the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110 are received are immediately transmitted to the display control device 113. Instead, it temporarily stores in the RAM 223, and instead sends a display variation start command to the display control device 113 to start the restart effect, and then starts the change effect at the BGM beat timing. Although the variation pattern command and the display stop type command are transmitted to the display control device 113 and the high-speed variation of the variation effect is started, the variation effect is apparently started at the beat timing of the BGM. In the embodiment, the table that receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110 is used. The timing for display generated by the variation pattern command and stop type commands for display immediately transmitted to the display control unit 113 starts the fast variation of the fluctuation effect.

  After the processing of S3502, the same processing of S2107 and S2108 as in the first embodiment is performed, and then a data table corresponding to a detailed variation pattern determined by the processing of S2104 is set (S3503). Then, the pointer 223g is initialized to 0 (S3504), and the variation display process is terminated.

  As a result, the MPU 221 sequentially counts up the pointer 223g initialized by the process of S3504, and stores various control information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 223g of the data table set by the process of S3403 in the data table. According to the control information read out from the storage area 222b, the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, the operation of the first accessory 87 (the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory) (Drive of the rotation motor 87e) is controlled.

  Here, various control information is read from the data table in the sound editing / output process (see FIG. 45) at the timing of BGM beats, as in the first embodiment. Therefore, since the voice output from the voice output device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 can be started in accordance with the timing of the beat of the BGM, the player can play the game rhythmically. Can enjoy. Accordingly, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, as described above, the BGM sound reproduction start information is defined in the first address (0001H) of the data table, and the BGM sound reproduction end information corresponds to the address corresponding to the time when the variation effect by the detailed variation pattern ends. Attached and specified in the data table. Also, at the address where the BGM sound reproduction end information is defined, stop sound reproduction information indicating that the change effect has been stopped is also defined. By referring to this data table, the MPU 221 starts playback of the BGM at the start of the variation effect, ends playback of the BGM at the end of the variation effect, and also generates a stop sound for the variation effect. Will be. Here, in the second embodiment, since the variation time is defined so that the variation effect ends at the BGM beat timing, the variation effect ends at the BGM beat timing, and the variation effect stops. Sound is also generated at the timing of BGM beats. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variation effect is stopped together with the rhythm of BGM. Therefore, since the variation effect can be ended rhythmically, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a sound editing / output process (S1908) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the sound editing / output processing (S1908).

  In this sound editing / output process, first, it is determined whether or not the pointer 223g is 0 (S3511). If the pointer 233g is not 0 (S3511: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the period T of the BGM beat being reproduced (S2121). As described above in the description of the first embodiment, the timer counter 223h is a counter for counting the period T of the BGM beat being reproduced. If the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the beat period T as a result of the process of S2121 (S2121: Yes), it is determined that the beat timing has been reached in the BGM being played, the process proceeds to S2128, and the pointer 223g is set. 1 is added (S2128), and the control information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 223g after the addition is read in the set data table (S2129). Thereafter, the same processing as in the first embodiment is executed.

  Thereby, at the timing of the BGM beat being reproduced, according to various control information defined in the data table, the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, the operation of the first accessory 87 Is controlled.

  If it is determined that the pointer 233g is 0 as a result of the process of S3531 (S3531: Yes), it is immediately after the data table is set by the MPU 221, so the determination process of S2121 is skipped and the process of S2128 is performed as it is. Move on to processing. In other words, immediately after the data table is set, BGM playback has not started, so the timing of the BGM beat by the determination processing in S2121 cannot be determined. Therefore, when the pointer 233g is 0, the process proceeds to S2128 as it is, so that the voice output from the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device are performed according to various control information defined in the first address (0001H) of the data table. The lighting / flashing of 227 and the operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled.

  Here, the data table is set by the MPU 221 at, for example, the timing at which the changing effect is started. Therefore, together with the start of the variation effect, the voice output from the voice output device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 can be started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the start winning sound output process (S2122) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the start winning sound output processing (S2122).

  In this start winning sound output process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the pointer 223g is 1 (S3521). If the value of the pointer 223g is not 1 (S3521: No), the process proceeds to S2151, and thereafter, the same process as in the first embodiment is executed.

  As a result, when a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is detected, the pitch sound that informs the player that there has been a ball is synchronized with the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM. Output. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically on the BGM rhythm, so that the player's feelings about the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in games can be enhanced.

  Further, when the incoming sound is pronounced, the pitch of the incoming sound is determined using the constituent sounds and the elapsed sound of the BGM chord (chord) at the sounding timing. The player can listen to the melody accompanied by BGM by the incoming sound that is generated with the matching pitch. Moreover, since the melody differs depending on the timing of the entrance and the number of entrances, the player can be entertained by various melodies that are played by the entrance sounds.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the pointer 223g is 1 by the process of S3512 (S3512: Yes), the value of the pointer 223g is changed from 0 to 1 by S2128 of the sound editing / output process (see FIG. 45). This means that the process is executed immediately after the count-up, that is, the process is executed for the first time after a detailed variation pattern is determined and a new data table is set accordingly. Is set to 0 (S3521), and the start winning sound output process is terminated. As a result, the number of balls entered into the first starting port 64 after the start of the variation effect based on the determined detailed variation pattern can be counted by the start winning counter 223d. Therefore, the sound output device 226 can output the incoming sound corresponding to the ball that has entered the first start port 64 after the start of the variation effect.

  In the sound editing / output process (see FIG. 45), the frame button operation sound output process (S2137) executed when an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is performed is the same as that in the first embodiment. Similarly, the details are almost the same as the start winning sound output processing. That is, the frame button operation sound output process is obtained by replacing the start winning counter 223d used in the start winning sound output process with the frame button operation frequency counter 223f and replacing the sound to be sounded with the operation sound from the winning sound. By executing the frame button operation sound output processing, the same operational effects as the winning sound output by the start winning sound output processing can be achieved in the operation sound.

  In particular, since the operation sound is pronounced in time with the beat of the BGM, a sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, the player can perform a game such as operating the frame button 22 rhythmically on the BGM rhythm, so that the player's feelings about the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in games can be enhanced.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment can achieve the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 59. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, the sound output from the sound output device 226 based on the effects determined by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110, A description will be given of a case where the lighting / flashing mode of the lamp display device 227 and the mode of the operation of the first accessory 87 (the driving of the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e) are determined and controlled. did.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the display control device 114 specifies display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and controls the specified display content from the display control device 114 by voice lamp control. Notify the device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 controls the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 according to the display content notified from the display control device 114.

  Accordingly, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the BGM beat period (T), whereas in the third embodiment, the display control is performed. The device 114 counts the BGM beat period (T), and the display control device 114 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the BGM beat and back beat timing.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the first embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the details of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223.

  The RAM 223 in the third embodiment is different from the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 9) in that a one-beat flag 223l and a backbeat flag 223m are provided instead of the timer counter 223h. . In the third embodiment, since the sound lamp control device 113 does not count the BGM beat period (T), the timer counter 223h is unnecessary.

  The one-beat flag 223l is a flag indicating that it is a BGM beat timing, and indicates that it is a BGM beat timing when it is on, and indicates that it is not a BGM beat timing when it is off. The back beat flag 223m is a flag indicating the timing of the back beat of the BGM. When the back beat flag is 223m, the back beat is the timing of the back beat of the BGM. Indicates no.

  The one-beat flag 223l and the backbeat flag 223m are both set to the initial value “OFF” in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the startup process (see FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on. Is set. Here, from the display control device 114, a beat command indicating the timing of the beat is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing of the beat of the BGM, and the back of the beat command at the timing of the back beat of the BGM. A beat command indicating the beat timing is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the MPU 221 receives a beat command indicating that it is the BGM beat timing from the display control device 114, the MPU 221 sets the one-beat flag 223l to ON. Further, when a beat command indicating the timing of the BGM back beat is received from the display control device 114, the back beat flag 223m is set to ON.

  The single beat flag 223l is referred to in sound editing / output processing (see FIGS. 56 and 57), and when the beat flag 223l is on, it is assumed that the timing of the beat of the BGM is the same as that in the first embodiment. The process of S2133 is executed.

  By performing the processing of S2128 to S2133 at the timing of the beat of BGM, various control information from the data table is read at the timing of the beat of BGM, and at the timing of the beat of BGM according to the various kinds of read control information, The sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled. For example, the sound reproduction can be started and stopped at the timing of the beat of the BGM by the processes of S2130 to S2133. Further, the lamp editing process (S1909) of the main process (FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 and the first accessory editing driving process (S1910) are performed based on the various control information read out here. The lighting / flashing of the display device 227 and the operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled.

  Thereby, in the pachinko machine 10, the sound output, the lighting / flashing of the lamp, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, the interest in the game by the player can be enhanced. For example, by the processing of S2130 to S2133, sound reproduction can be started and stopped at the beat timing of BGM, so that the player can play a rhythmic game.

  The data table used in the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment is provided for each effect determined by the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with a command from the main control device 110 or the like. On the other hand, the data table used in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment is provided one by one for all display contents notified from the display control device 114.

  Further, the one-beat flag 223l is referred to in the start winning sound output processing (see FIGS. 58 and 59) and the frame button operation sound output processing, and when the beat flag 223l is on, it is assumed that it is the timing of the BGM beat. Similarly to the first embodiment, the processing of S2156 to S2168 is executed. Further, the back beat flag 223m is also referred to in the start winning sound output processing (see FIGS. 58 and 59) and the frame button operation sound output processing, and when the back beat flag 223m is on, the timing of the back beat of the BGM. If there is, the process of S2170 to S2179 is executed as in the first embodiment.

  As a result, the incoming sound and the operation sound are sounded in accordance with the timing of the BGM beat and the back beat, so that a sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically on the BGM rhythm, so that the player's feelings about the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in games can be enhanced.

  Also, when sounding an incoming sound or an operation sound, the pitch of the incoming sound or the operation sound is determined using the constituent sound or elapsed sound of the BGM chord (chord) at the sounding timing. Thus, the incoming sound and the operation sound are not only pronounced in time with the beat or back beat of the BGM, but are also pronounced with a pitch that matches the BGM chord at that time. Therefore, a melody accompanied by BGM can be composed of an incoming sound or an operation sound and can be heard by the player. In addition, the melody differs depending on the timing of entering and operating, the number of entering and the number of operations. Therefore, the player can be entertained by various melodies that are played by the incoming sound or the operation sound depending on the time.

  The one-beat flag 223l and the back-beat flag 223m include start winning sound output processing (see FIGS. 58 and 59) and frame button operation sound output processing in sound editing / output processing (see FIGS. 56 and 57). After the processing referring to these flags is performed, both are set to OFF (S4002 and S4003 in FIG. 57).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 48 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 in the third embodiment is different from the display control device 114 in the first embodiment in that the work RAM 233 is provided with a timer counter 233f and stored in the display data table storage area 232a. The content defined in the display data table is partially different.

  The timer counter 233f is a counter for counting the BGM beat period in the display control device 114. The MPU 231 uses the timer counter 233f to determine the timing of the BGM beat and back beat being played. In the MPU 231, in the display setting process (S 2603), based on a command newly received from the audio lamp control device 113, it is determined whether or not it is a BGM change timing, and when it is determined that it is a BGM change timing, A BGM playback start command including information related to the changed BGM type is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 to instruct the audio lamp control device 113 to start playback of a new BGM, and the timer counter 233f is set to 1. Initialization is performed (S3611 to S3614 in FIG. 51).

  The program ROM 232 stores the tempo of all the BGMs to be played back, and the MPU 231 reads the tempo of the BGM to be played back from the program ROM 232 and calculates the beat period T therefrom (see FIG. S3613 in FIG. 51).

  Thereafter, the timer counter 233f is incremented by 1 in the display setting process executed every 20 milliseconds. However, if the value of the timer counter 233f coincides with the beat period T, “1” is set instead of adding 1. Thus, the BGM beat cycle is counted by the timer counter 233f.

  When the value of the timer counter 233f is T, the MPU 231 transmits a beat command indicating the BGM beat timing to the audio lamp control device 113 as the BGM beat timing. The sound lamp control device 113 receives the beat command indicating that it is the BGM beat timing, thereby grasping the BGM beat timing. In addition, when the value of the timer counter 233f is T / 2, the MPU 231 gives a beat command indicating that it is the timing of the BGM back beat to the audio lamp control device 113, assuming that it is the timing of the BGM back beat. Send. The sound lamp control device 113 receives the beat command indicating that it is the timing of the BGM back beat, thereby grasping the back beat timing of the BGM beat.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 at the timing of the beat of the BGM, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, the operation of the first action 87 (the first action up / down movement motor 87a and the first action). The driving of the one-function rotating motor 87e) is controlled. As a result, in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, sound output, lamp lighting / flashing, and operation of the first accessory 87 are performed.

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 has an incoming sound to notify that there has been an entrance to the first entrance 64 and an operation to the frame button 22 at the timing of BGM beat or back beat. Control is performed to generate an operation sound for notifying that. Therefore, since the incoming sound and the operation sound are generated at the timing of the BGM beat and the back beat, the player can listen to the incoming sound and the operation sound that match the rhythm of the BGM.

  Since the display control device 114 updates the value of the timer counter 223f every 20 milliseconds, it can only count the BGM beat period at intervals of 20 milliseconds. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the BGM tempo is determined so that the BGM beat cycle is a multiple of 20 milliseconds. That is, the BGM tempo is determined based on the update interval of the value of the timer counter 223 f in the display control device 114. For example, when the V interrupt process is executed every 30 milliseconds, the value of the timer counter 223f is also updated every 30 milliseconds. Therefore, the BGM tempo is determined so that the BGM beat period is a multiple of 30 milliseconds.

  Next, details of the display data table stored in the display data table storage area 232a of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table for change in the display data table.

  The display data table in the third embodiment is different from the display data table in the first embodiment in that, in addition to the drawing contents, the display contents of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at some addresses from now on. It is a point that prescribes. For example, when displaying high-speed fluctuation in a variation effect, the display content is defined as “high-speed fluctuation display”, and when displaying a character image of a girl, the display content is defined as “girl character display”. When displaying an image, the display content is defined as “light emission effect display”.

  The display content is also included in the additional data table. That is, in the additional data table that defines the display of an image to be displayed in addition to the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table, the display contents are defined for some addresses.

  The display contents defined in the display data table and the additional data table are used to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In other words, when the display content is specified at the address indicated by the pointer 223c in the display data table or the additional data table, the MPU 231 sends a display type command including information indicating the display content to the sound lamp control device 113. To send.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the display type command from the display control device 114, the sound output device 226 outputs sound corresponding to the display content indicated by the display type command, and the lamp display device 227 is turned on / flashing. And control to operate the first accessory 87. Accordingly, it is possible to easily output a sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents, to turn on / flash the lamp display device 227, or to operate the first accessory 87.

  Here, in the display data table and the additional data table, a new image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the timing of the BGM, the image is deleted, or the image is changed. The drawing contents are specified, and the display contents are specified. Therefore, the audio output from the audio output device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are also started in accordance with the beat timing of the BGM. Then, as described above, in the audio lamp control device 113, the audio output from the audio output device 226 that has been executed, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the first accessory 87 in accordance with the timing of the BGM beat. To control the operation. Therefore, the display of the image on the third symbol display device 81, the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp control device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM. The player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Accordingly, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, details of the variation pattern command process (S2713), which is one process of the command determination process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the third embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing.

  In the variation pattern command processing in the third embodiment, after the detailed variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is extracted by the processing of S2831, the detailed variation pattern flag corresponding to the extracted detailed variation pattern is turned on. The detailed variation pattern flag corresponding to the other detailed variation pattern is set to OFF (S3601). Here, the detailed variation pattern flag is a flag provided for all the detailed variation patterns, and indicates that the variation effect is performed by the detailed variation pattern corresponding to the detailed variation pattern flag that is turned on.

  Next, the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S3602). After the null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b to clear the contents (S2833), the restart effect specified by the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S3602 is performed. Time data representing time is set in the time counter 233e (S3603). The pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2835), and the confirmation command flag, the demonstration display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to OFF (S2836). Then, the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S3602 while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the process of S2835. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified.

  That is, when the MPU 231 receives the display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113, first, the MPU 231 executes a restart effect (an effect in which the third symbol moves positively and vertically) on the third symbol display device. Then, when the timing of the beat of BGM is reached, a variation effect according to the detailed variation pattern corresponding to the detailed variation pattern flag set to ON by the processing of S3601 is started. First, the high-speed variation of the third symbol is started. It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, in the display data table for change which is a display data table for executing the change effect according to the detailed change pattern, the change effect of the third design is apparently displayed at the beat timing of the BGM, and the change effect is stopped and displayed. It looks like it was. Specifically, the fake display is made by changing the fluctuation table display data table for a time shorter than the original fluctuation time so that the fluctuation effect is stopped and displayed at the beat timing of the BGM by the fluctuation display data table. It is realized by prescribing. In the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the original fixed display timing is reached, and the original fluctuation time is secured. As a result, the player can be regarded as having the variation effect stopped along the rhythm of the BGM.

  Therefore, it is possible to show the player as if the changing effect is started in accordance with the beat of the BGM and stopped. Therefore, the player can be put on the rhythm of BGM and entertain the variation effect.

  Next, details of the display determination process (S2603) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In the display determination process in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the new command flag is on and a new command has been determined in the previous command determination process (S2901: Yes), after the hold image setting process (S2904) Or, in the processing of S2903, if it is determined that the new reserved ball number command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S2903: No), it is next determined whether or not it is the BGM change timing (S3611). . Whether or not the BGM is changed is determined based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113. For example, based on the command, there is a timing for starting playback of BGM that is output when the jackpot is notified of the jackpot, a timing for starting or ending playback of the jackpot effect BGM that is output during the jackpot presentation, etc. Is determined as the BGM change timing.

  If it is determined that it is the BGM change timing (S3611: Yes), a BGM reproduction start command including information on the changed BGM type is generated and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 (S3612). . As a result, the audio lamp control device 113 starts reproduction of the type of BGM included in the BGM reproduction start command, and the audio output device 226 outputs the BGM.

  Next, the tempo of the type of BGM at which playback is started is read from the program ROM 232, the beat period T of the BGM is calculated, and stored in the work RAM 233 (S3613). Also, the timer counter 233f is initialized to 1 (S3614). The timer counter 233f is updated while counting up in the display setting process executed every 20 milliseconds, and by counting up to the BGM beat period T calculated in the process of S3613, the MPU 231 The counter 233f can be used to grasp the timing of the BGM beat being played.

  As a result of the process of S2901, when it is determined that the new command flag is OFF (S2901: No), as a result of the process of S3611, it is determined that it is not the BGM change timing (S3611: No), or S3614 After the process, the process proceeds to S3615. In the process of S3615, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to the period T of the BGM beat being reproduced (S3615). As a result, if the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to the period T of the BGM beat being played back (S3615: Yes), it is the timing of the BGM beat, so a beat command indicating that it is the timing of the BGM beat The setting is made (S3616).

  The beat command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started next. The voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the BGM beat timing by receiving the beat command. Since the beat command is transmitted at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started next, the transmission of the beat command is permitted at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt process is executed. The display setting process executed in the V interrupt process is preceded by a command determination process, which is not necessarily executed at intervals of 20 milliseconds, and has a slight deviation. Therefore, the generation of the beat command is not accurately performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when the generated beat command is transmitted as it is to the voice lamp control device 113, the beat command of the BGM grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 is transmitted. There is a possibility that the interval may be shifted. In contrast, in this embodiment, the beat command is permitted to be transmitted at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V-interrupt processing is executed, so that the BGM beat interval grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 is accurately maintained. Can be added.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the detailed variation pattern flag is set by the processing of S3601 of the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 50) (S3617). If the detailed variation pattern flag is set (S3617: Yes), the detailed variation pattern setting process is executed (S3618).

  Details of the detailed variation pattern setting process (S3618) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the detailed variation pattern setting process (S3618) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114. The detailed variation pattern setting process is a process of setting a variation display data table corresponding to a detailed variation pattern in the display data table buffer 233a and executing a variation effect based on the detailed variation pattern.

  In this detailed variation pattern setting process, first, the display data table for variation corresponding to the detailed variation pattern for which the detailed variation pattern flag is set to ON is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S3631). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the additional data table buffer 233b (S3632).

  Next, time data representing the time for which display is controlled by the display data table for change set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S3631 is set in the time counter 233e (S3633). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S3634), and the confirmation command flag, the demonstration display flag, the confirmation display flag, and all the detailed variation pattern flags are all set to OFF (S3635). Thereafter, the process returns to the display setting process.

  Thereby, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the process of S3634, the display data table for change set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S3631 is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233c. The specified drawing content is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. Therefore, according to the change display data table set by the processing of S3631, the change effect based on the detailed change pattern can be executed by the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, when the MPU 231 receives the display variation pattern command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 does not immediately execute the variation effect according to the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The restart effect is executed. Then, the detailed variation pattern setting process is executed at the beat timing of the BGM, and the execution of the variation effect according to the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is started. Specifically, the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as described above, in the display data table for change, which is a display data table for executing the change effect according to the detailed change pattern, the change effect of the third pattern is apparently changed at the timing of the BGM beat. Is shown as if stopped. As a result, the player can be regarded as having the variation effect stopped along the rhythm of the BGM. Therefore, it is possible for the player to start the variation effect according to the beat of the BGM and to display it as if it is stopped, so that the player can enjoy the variation effect on the rhythm of the BGM. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. After executing the detailed variation pattern setting process (S3618) or when it is determined that the detailed variation pattern flag is not set by the processing of S3617 (S3617: No), then the value of the timer counter 233f is set to 1 (S3619). Thereby, counting of the period T of the BGM beat is started again by the timer counter 233f. Then, the process proceeds to S2905.

  As a result of the processing of S3615, when the value of the timer counter 233f is not equal to the beat period T of the BGM (S3615: No), the value of the timer counter 233f is then equal to half the beat period of the BGM (T / 2) It is determined whether or not (S3620). If the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to half the period of the BGM beat (T / 2) (S3620: Yes), it is the timing of the BGM back beat, so that it is the timing of the BGM back beat. The beat command shown is set (S3621).

  The beat command set here is also transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started next, similarly to the beat command indicating the beat timing. The voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the timing of the BGM back beat by a beat command indicating that it is the BGM back beat timing. The reason why the beat command indicating the timing of the back beat of BGM is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started next is the beat timing of the BGM. Is the same as the reason for transmitting the beat command to the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started next. In other words, by allowing the beat command to be transmitted at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V-interrupt process is executed, it is possible to accurately maintain the BGM beat and back beat intervals grasped by the voice lamp control device 113. it can.

  If it is determined that the value of the timer counter 233f is not equal to half of the BGM beat period (T / 2) after the process of S3621 or the process of S3620 (S3620: No), the process proceeds to S3622. Then, 1 is added to the value of the timer counter 233f, and the timer counter 233f is updated (S3622). Then, the process proceeds to S2905.

  In the process of S2905, the same pointer update process as in the first embodiment is executed (S2905). Thereafter, the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233c updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b (S3623). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S3623 together with the pending image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined. When Null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. When the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared with null data, the null data is always expanded from the additional data table buffer 233b.

  In the process of S3623, in the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b, the display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the address indicated by the pointer 233c. If the contents (see FIG. 49) are defined, a display type command for notifying the display contents to the sound lamp control device 113 is generated, and the generated display type command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Thereby, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is notified with respect to the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113. FIG. In the sound lamp control device 113, the sound corresponding to the display content notified by the display type command is output from the sound output device 226, the lamp display device 227 is turned on / flashes, and the first accessory 87 is operated. Done.

  Here, as described above, in the display data table and the additional data table, the drawing contents are specified and combined so that the image is newly displayed, changed, or deleted at the timing of the beat of the BGM. The display contents are specified. That is, the display content is defined in association with the address that is the timing of the beat of BGM, and the display type command is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing of the beat of BGM.

  Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, the reproduction of the sound in accordance with the display content, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are started at the timing of the beat of BGM. As described above, since the output of the sound according to the display content and the start of the driving of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Accordingly, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game.

  After the processing of S3623, the process proceeds to S2911, which is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thereafter the same processing as that of the first embodiment is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the main process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the main processing.

  The main process in the third embodiment is different from the main process in the first embodiment in that the display command determination process (S3701) is executed after the command determination process (S1914). In this display command determination processing (S3701), processing according to the command received from the display control device 114 is performed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 54, details of the display command determination processing (S3701) will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing display command determination processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113. The command received from the display control device 114 is temporarily stored in a display control command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223.

  In the display command determination process, first, from the display control command storage area, the first command received from the display control device 114 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the display type command is received from the display control device 110. It is determined whether or not (S3801). If it is determined that the display type command has been received (S3801: Yes), the display content (display type) to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is extracted from the received display type command (S3802). Then, the data table corresponding to the display content is read from the ROM 222 and set (S3803), the pointer 223g is initialized to 0 (S3804), and the display command determination process is terminated.

  Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 reproduces the sound according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 according to the data table set by the processing of S3803 and outputs it from the sound output device 226. Further, according to the data table, the lamp display device 227 is controlled to be turned on and blinking, and the first accessory up / down movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e are further operated to operate the first accessory 87. Control to drive.

  Here, as described above, the display type command is a command transmitted from the display control device 114 at the timing of the BGM beat being reproduced. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 performs the playback of the voice corresponding to the display content indicated by the display type command, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87, the BGM beat timing. You can start with

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the display type command has not been received as a result of the process of S3801 (S3801: No), it is then determined whether or not a BGM playback start command has been received from the display control device 114 (S3808). . As a result, if it is determined that a BGM playback start command has been received (S3808: Yes), a playback start command for the type of BGM specified by the BGM playback start command is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S3809). As a result, reproduction of the designated BGM is started and output from the sound output device 226.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the BGM to be played back is a time-saving BGM (S3810). If it is a time-saving BGM (S3810: Yes), the time-saving BGM playback flag 223c is set to ON (S3811). If it is not for the BGM (S3810: No), the time-shortening BGM regeneration flag 223c is set to OFF (S3812). As a result, while the time-saving BGM is being played back as BGM, the incoming sound for notifying the entrance to the first entrance 64 is generated by the sound editing / output processing S2134 and S2135 (see FIG. 56). A start winning sound output process that is played back at the beat timing of the time-saving BGM is executed. When the process of S3811 or S3812 ends, the display command determination process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the BGM playback start command has not been received as a result of the processing of S3808 (S3808: No), it is then determined whether a beat command has been received from the display control device 114 (S3813). If it is determined that a beat command has been received (S3813: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the beat command indicates a BGM beat timing (S3814).

  As a result, if it is a beat command indicating the timing of the beat of BGM (S3814: Yes), the one-beat flag 223l is set to ON (S3815), and the display command determination process is terminated. Thereby, the MPU 221 performs control while judging that it is the timing of the beat of the BGM based on the one-beat flag 223l that is turned on.

  On the other hand, if the result of the process of S3814 is not a beat command indicating that it is a BGM beat timing (S3814: No), the beat command confirmed to be received by the process of S3813 indicates the timing of the BGM backbeat. Since it is a beat command, the back beat flag 223m is set to ON (S3816), and the display command determination process is terminated. Thereby, the MPU 221 performs control while judging that it is the timing of the BGM back beat based on the turned back beat flag 223m.

  If it is determined that the beat command has not been received as a result of the process of S3813 (S3813: No), it is then determined whether another command has been received from the display control device 114 (S3817). If no other command is received (S3817: No), the display command determination process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if another command has been received (S3817: Yes), the process according to the other command is executed (S3818), the display command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  With reference to FIG. 55, details of the variable display process (S1913) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this variation display processing (S1913).

  In this variation display processing, first, as in the first embodiment, after executing the processing of S2101 to S2104, for display, a detailed variation pattern determined in the processing of S2104 is notified to the display control device 114. A variation pattern command is generated and set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3501). Further, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop symbol acquired by the processing of S2103 is generated and set to transmit the command to the display control device 114 (S3502).

  Here, the set display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S1902) executed later in the main process (see FIG. 24). Is done.

  That is, in the first embodiment, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command generated when the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110 are received are immediately transmitted to the display control device 113. Instead, it temporarily stores in the RAM 223, and instead sends a display variation start command to the display control device 113 to start the restart effect, and then starts the change effect at the BGM beat timing. Although the variation pattern command and the display stop type command are transmitted to the display control device 113 and the high-speed variation of the variation effect is started, the variation effect is apparently started at the beat timing of the BGM. In the embodiment, the table that receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110 is used. The timing for display generated by the variation pattern command and the display stop type command immediately send to the display control unit 113. When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, it first executes a restart effect, and at the timing of the BGM beat being played, the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is displayed. Based on this, the variation effect is executed.

  After the processing of S3502, the same processing of S2107 and S2108 as in the first embodiment is performed, and the variation display processing is ended.

  Next, the details of the sound editing / output process (S1908) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57 are flowcharts showing the sound editing / output processing (S1908).

  In the sound editing / output processing in the third embodiment, first, as shown in FIG. 57, it is determined whether or not the one-beat flag 223l is on (S4001). If the one-shot flag 223l is off (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S2134. On the other hand, if the one-shot flag 223l is on (S4001: Yes), it is the timing of the BGM beat being reproduced. The same processes of S2128 to S2133 as in the first embodiment are executed, and the process proceeds to S2134. That is, the control information associated with the address indicated by the pointer 223g of the set data table is read while sequentially incrementing the pointer 223g at the timing of the BGM beat being reproduced, and if there is sound reproduction start information, A playback start command including information on the sound to start playback is set in the sound output LSI 301. If there is sound playback stop information, a playback stop command including information on the sound to stop playback is set in the sound output LSI 301.

  That is, various control information is read from the data table at the BGM beat timing, and the voice output from the sound output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned on at the BGM beat timing according to the read various control information. -Flashing and operation | movement of the 1st actor 87 are controlled. For example, the sound reproduction can be started and stopped at the timing of the beat of the BGM by the processes of S2130 to S2133. Further, the lamp editing process (S1909) of the main process (FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 and the first accessory editing driving process (S1910) are performed based on the various control information read out here. The lighting / flashing of the display device 227 and the operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled.

  Thereby, in the pachinko machine 10, the sound output, the lighting / flashing of the lamp, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, the interest in the game by the player can be enhanced. For example, by the processing of S2130 to S2133, sound reproduction can be started and stopped at the beat timing of BGM, so that the player can play a rhythmic game.

  The processing of S2134 to S2137 and the processing of S2138 to S2141 shown in FIG. 57 are the same processing as in the first embodiment. And after finishing the process of S2141, or when it is judged that there exists the completion information of the effect which requires operation of the frame button 22 as a result of the process of S2140 (S2140: No), in 3rd Embodiment, The process proceeds to S4002, and the one-beat flag 223l is set to OFF (S4002). Further, the back beat flag 223m is set to OFF (S4003), and the sound editing / output process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, details of the start winning sound output process (S2135) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. 58 and 59 are flowcharts showing the start winning sound output processing (S2135).

  The start winning sound output process in the third embodiment is different from the start winning sound output process in the first embodiment except for the judgment of whether or not it is the timing of the BGM beat and back beat being played back, Same as the start winning sound output process in the first embodiment. Specifically, the process of S4101 is executed in place of the process of S2155 in the first embodiment, and it is determined whether or not the one-beat flag 223l is on, thereby determining whether or not it is the timing of the BGM beat being played back. Judgment is made (S4101). If the one-beat flag 223l is on (S4101: Yes), it is the timing of the BGM beat that is being played back, and therefore the same processing of S215 to S2168 as in the first embodiment is executed.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S4101, if the one-beat flag 223l is OFF (S4101: No), the process of S4102 shown in FIG. 49 is executed instead of the process of S2169 of the first embodiment. That is, by determining whether or not the back beat flag 223m is on, it is determined whether or not it is the back beat timing of the BGM being played back (S4102).

  If the back beat flag 223m is on (S4102: Yes), it is the back beat timing of the BGM being played back, and therefore the same processes of S2170 to S2179 as in the first embodiment are executed. On the other hand, as a result of the process of S4102, if the back beat flag 223m is off (S4102: No), the start winning sound output process is terminated.

  In the start winning sound output process in the third embodiment, the processes in S2151 to S2154 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  Therefore, the MPU 221 can achieve the same operational effects as the start winning sound output process in the first embodiment by executing the start winning sound output process in the third embodiment.

  The details of the frame button operation sound output process (S2137) in the third embodiment are substantially the same as the start winning sound output process in the third embodiment, and specifically, used in the start winning sound output process. The frame button operation sound output process is performed by replacing the start winning counter 223d with the frame button operation frequency counter 223f and replacing the sound to be generated from the winning sound with the operation sound. Therefore, the MPU 221 can achieve the same effects as the frame button operation sound output process in the first embodiment by executing the frame button operation sound output process in the third embodiment.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the display control device 114 counts the period of the BGM beat being played back, detects the timing of the BGM beat and the back beat, Notify the control device 113. Then, the sound lamp control device 113 performs control so that sound reproduction, lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and operation of the first accessory 87 are performed at the timing of BGM beat or back beat. Thereby, there exists an effect similar to 1st Embodiment.

  In other words, when a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is detected, the pitching sound for notifying the player that there has been a ball is synchronized with the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM. Output. In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated, an operation sound for notifying the player that the operation has been performed is output in accordance with the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat.

  As a result, the incoming sound and the operation sound are pronounced in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that a sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically on the BGM rhythm, so that the player's feelings about the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in games can be enhanced.

  Also, when sounding an incoming sound or an operation sound, the pitch of the incoming sound or the operation sound is determined using the constituent sound or elapsed sound of the BGM chord (chord) at the sounding timing. As a result, the incoming sound and the operation sound are not only pronounced according to the beat of the BGM, but are also pronounced at a pitch that matches the BGM chord at that time. Therefore, a melody accompanied by BGM can be composed of an incoming sound or an operation sound and can be heard by the player. In addition, the melody differs depending on the timing of entering and operating, the number of entering and the number of operations. Therefore, the player can be entertained by various melodies that are played by the incoming sound or the operation sound depending on the time.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 performs a display that vibrates the third symbol up and down on the third symbol display device 81 from the original timing of the start of fluctuation to the timing of the beat of BGM. (Design shaking period). Then, when the first BGM beat timing comes from the original variation start timing, reading of the data table corresponding to the detailed variation pattern determined for the variation effect is started at that timing. In the 3 symbol display device 81, the high speed fluctuation of the 3rd symbol is started.

  Here, a display pattern is set in advance so that display of various effect images during the changing effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed in accordance with the beat of the BGM. Further, the output from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display of the effect image and the lighting / flashing of the lamp of the lamp display device 227 are defined in the data table, and these are also adjusted in accordance with the beat of the BGM. Done.

  Further, in the variation effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the 3rd symbol is once stopped and displayed at the timing of the beat of the BGM just before the original confirmation display is performed. The sound output device 226 generates a stop sound to be expressed. Thereafter, until the original confirmed display timing is reached, the 3rd symbol display device 81 performs a display of vibrating the third symbol up and down (design fluctuation period), and the 3rd symbol is finally displayed at the original confirmed display timing.

  As described above, the fluctuation effect is originally started irrespective of the beat of the BGM and is displayed in a definite manner, but in this embodiment, high-speed fluctuation is started in accordance with the timing of the beat, and once Stop display. Then, until the high-speed fluctuation starts from the original fluctuation start timing, and until the original fixed display timing comes after the stop display is performed, a display that vibrates the third symbol up and down is used as the symbol fluctuation period. Do.

  Thereby, in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, a change production is started according to the beat of BGM, and it can show to a player as if the stop display was performed. In addition, various effect images displayed during the change effect can be displayed in accordance with the beat of the BGM, and further, the output of the sound according to the change effect, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the second The operation of the single accessory 87 can also be performed in accordance with the beat of the BGM. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a sense that the variation effect is also performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, it is possible to perform a rhythmic game and improve the interest of the player.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment has the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 in the corresponding embodiment, based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. Can do.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment described above, as with the first embodiment, the timing for starting the BGM change, such as the timing for starting playback of the BGM that is output when the jackpot is notified and the jackpot effect, Once the BGM is changed, such as when the playback of the jackpot effect BGM that is sometimes output starts or ends, the BGM continues to play regardless of the start and stop of the change effect, and the appearance of the change effect appears (high speed The case has been described in which the start of fluctuation) and the sham stop display (temporary stop of the third symbol) are executed at the timing of the beat of the BGM.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment, the reproduction of the BGM is started at the start of the variation effect, and the reproduction of the BGM is terminated at the end of the variation effect. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the display control device 114 specifies the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the specified display content is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device. 113, the sound lamp control device 113 displays the display contents notified from the display control device 114, and accordingly, the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the first role. It is common to the third embodiment in that the operation of the object 87 is controlled. In addition, the display control device 114 counts the BGM beat cycle (T), and the display control device 114 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the timing of the BGM beat and back beat. Common with form.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the third embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the details of the display setting process (S2603) executed in the display control apparatus 114 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the display setting process (S2603).

  In the display setting process in the fourth embodiment, the processes of S3611 to S14 and the processes of S3615 to S3622 executed in the display setting process in the third embodiment are not executed. In addition, after the pointer update process (S2905) is executed, the processes of S4201 to S4210 are executed instead of the process of S3624. In other processes in the fourth embodiment, the same processes as the display setting process in the third embodiment are executed.

  First, in the process of S4201, the address indicated by the pointer 233c updated by the pointer update process (S2905) is displayed from the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. The contents are expanded (S4201). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S3623 together with the pending image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined. When Null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. When the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared with null data, the null data is always expanded from the additional data table buffer 233b.

  In the process of S4201, the display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from now on at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. If the contents (see FIG. 49) are defined, a display type command for notifying the display contents to the sound lamp control device 113 is generated, and the generated display type command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Thereby, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is notified with respect to the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113. FIG. In the sound lamp control device 113, the sound corresponding to the display content notified by the display type command is output from the sound output device 226, the lamp display device 227 is turned on / flashes, and the first accessory 87 is operated. Done.

  Here, when the display data table for change is set, high-speed change display is defined as the display content at the first address (0001H), and accordingly, the MPU 231 instructs the audio lamp control device 113. The display type command indicating the high-speed fluctuation display of the detailed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table is transmitted. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the display type command, the sound lamp control device 113 starts reproduction of BGM corresponding to the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display type command. That is, the reproduction of BGM is started in accordance with the start of the variation effect.

  Further, in the display data table for change, stop display is defined as the display content at the last address corresponding to the end time of the change effect, and accordingly, the MPU 231 displays the stop display to the audio lamp control device 113. The display type command shown is transmitted. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the display type command, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a stop sound indicating that the change effect has been stopped, and stops the reproduction of the BGM.

  Here, in the fourth embodiment, the variation time is defined so that the variation effect ends at the beat timing of the BGM. Therefore, the variation effect ends at the timing of the beat of BGM, and the stop sound of the variation effect is also sounded at the timing of the beat of BGM. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variation effect is stopped together with the rhythm of BGM. Therefore, since the variation effect can be ended rhythmically, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Also in the fourth embodiment, the display data table and the additional data table define the drawing contents so that the image is newly displayed, changed, or deleted at the timing of the beat of the BGM. The display contents are also specified. That is, the display content is defined in association with the address that is the timing of the beat of BGM, and the display type command is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing of the beat of BGM.

  Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, the reproduction of the sound in accordance with the display content, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are started at the timing of the beat of BGM. As described above, since the output of the sound according to the display content and the start of the driving of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Accordingly, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game.

  After the process of S4201, it is determined whether it is a BGM change timing (S4202). As the BGM change timing, for example, in addition to the start timing of the above-described variation effect, the timing for starting the display indicating that the jackpot effect has been started, the timing for starting the jackpot effect, and the display indicating the end of the jackpot effect are started. There are timings. These timings are determined based on display contents defined in the set display data table and additional data table.

  As a result of the process of S4202, if it is determined that it is the BGM change timing (S4202: Yes), the tempo of the BGM of the type at which playback is started is read from the program ROM 232, and the beat period T of the BGM is calculated. And stored in the work RAM 233 (S4203). Also, the timer counter 233f is initialized to 1 (S4204). The timer counter 233f is updated while counting up in the display setting process executed every 20 milliseconds, and by counting up to the BGM beat period T calculated in the process of S4203, the MPU 231 The counter 233f can be used to grasp the timing of the BGM beat being played.

  If it is determined that it is not the GM change timing after the process of S4204 or as a result of the process of S4202 (S4202: No), the value of the timer counter 233f is then equal to the period T of the BGM beat being played back It is determined whether or not (S4205). As a result, if the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to the period T of the BGM beat being played back (S4205: Yes), the beat command indicates that it is the timing of the BGM beat because it is the BGM beat timing. The setting is made (S4206).

  The beat command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started next. The voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the BGM beat timing by receiving the beat command. Accordingly, an incoming sound for notifying the player of the first incoming sound 64, an operating sound for notifying that the frame button 22 has been operated, and the like are generated by the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing of the beat of the BGM. Can be pronounced.

  Since the beat command is transmitted at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started next, the transmission of the beat command is permitted at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt process is executed. The display setting process executed in the V interrupt process is preceded by a command determination process, which is not necessarily executed at intervals of 20 milliseconds, and has a slight deviation. Therefore, the generation of the beat command is not accurately performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when the generated beat command is transmitted as it is to the voice lamp control device 113, the beat command of the BGM grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 is transmitted. There is a possibility that the interval may be shifted. In contrast, in this embodiment, the beat command is permitted to be transmitted at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V-interrupt processing is executed, so that the BGM beat interval grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 is accurately maintained. Can be added.

  Next, the value of the timer counter 233f is set to 1 (S4607). Thereby, counting of the period T of the BGM beat is started again by the timer counter 233f. Then, the process proceeds to S2911.

  If the value of the timer counter 233f is not equal to the BGM beat period T as a result of the process of S4205 (S4205: No), then the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to half the BGM beat period (T / 2) It is determined whether or not (S4208). If the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to half the period of the BGM beat (T / 2) (S4208: Yes), it is the timing of the BGM back beat, so that it is the timing of the BGM back beat. The beat command shown is set (S4209). Therefore, the incoming sound, the operation sound, and the like can be generated by the sound lamp control device 113 using not only the BGM beat timing but also the back beat timing.

  The beat command set here is also transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started next, similarly to the beat command indicating the beat timing. The voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the timing of the BGM back beat by a beat command indicating that it is the BGM back beat timing. The reason why the beat command indicating the timing of the back beat of BGM is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started next is the beat timing of the BGM. Is the same as the reason for transmitting the beat command to the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started next. In other words, by allowing the beat command to be transmitted at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V-interrupt process is executed, it is possible to accurately maintain the BGM beat and back beat intervals grasped by the voice lamp control device 113. it can.

  If it is determined that the value of the timer counter 233f is not equal to half of the BGM beat period (T / 2) after the process of S4209 or the process of S4208 (S4208: No), then the timer counter The timer counter 233f is updated by adding 1 to the value of 233f (S4210). Then, the process proceeds to S2911.

  As described above, also in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, if a ball entering the first ball inlet 64 (start winning prize) is detected while the time-saving BGM is being reproduced as the BGM, there is a ball entry. The incoming sound that informs the player of the fact can be output in accordance with the timing of the BGM beat or back beat. In addition, while a performance requiring operation of the frame button 22 is being performed, an operation sound for notifying the player that the frame button 22 has been operated is output in accordance with the timing of the BGM and the back beat. can do. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically on the BGM rhythm, so that the player's feelings about the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in games can be enhanced.

  In addition, when sounding an incoming sound or operation sound, the pitch of the incoming sound or operation sound is determined using the constituent sounds or elapsed sound of the BGM chord (chord) at the sounding timing. A player can listen to a melody accompanied by BGM by an incoming sound or an operation sound generated at a pitch that matches the BGM chord. In addition, the melody varies depending on the timing and number of balls entered, or the timing and number of times of operation of the frame button 22, so that various melody can be played with the incoming sound and operation sound depending on the occasion. A melody can entertain a player.

  In particular, since the operation sound is pronounced in time with the beat of the BGM, a sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, the player can perform a game such as operating the frame button 22 rhythmically on the BGM rhythm, so that the player's feelings about the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in games can be enhanced.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment can achieve the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 in the corresponding embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first to third embodiments. .

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. In the first to fourth embodiments, after sounding an incoming sound or operation sound having a pitch of a constituent sound of a chord with a certain BGM beat, the elapsed sound of the same chord is sounded at the timing of the subsequent beat of the BGM. The progress of the back beat when the incoming sound or the operation sound with a high pitch is generated and the incoming sound or the operation sound with the same chord pitch as the pitch is generated at the next BGM beat timing. When the pitch of the component sound at the next beat is defined in association with the pitch of the component sound at the first beat by the elapsed sound reproduction pitch setting table 222c (see FIG. 6) explained.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the pitch of the elapsed sound at the back beat and the constituent sound at the next beat in such a case is represented by the BGM key being played (the main tone of the entire BGM) and the current tone. Calculation is performed from the BGM code and the pitch of the first beat.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the first embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted. In addition, it cannot be overemphasized that the invention implement | achieved instead of 1st Embodiment in 5th Embodiment is applicable also to the pachinko machine 10 of 2nd-4th embodiment.

  61 and 62 describe details of the start winning sound output processing (S2122) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. 61 and 62 are flowcharts showing the start winning sound output processing (S2122).

  The start winning sound output process in the fifth embodiment is different from the start winning sound output process in the first embodiment when a progress sound is output as a winning sound at the timing of the back beat of the BGM (S2172: Yes). The point of executing the process of S4402 (see FIG. 62) instead of the process of S2174 (see FIG. 30) of the first embodiment, and when outputting a winning sound at the beat timing of BGM, If the elapsed sound is being generated (S2160: Yes), the process of S4401 (see FIG. 61) is executed instead of the process of S2164 (see FIG. 29). Other processes (S2151 to S2163, S2165 to S2173, S2175 to 2179) executed in the start winning sound output process are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  In the process of S4402 (FIG. 62), the pitch of the winning sound reproduced at the previous beat read from the pitch information memory 223k by the process of S2173 executed immediately before, the BGM key being reproduced, From the current BGM code, the pitch of the winning sound having the pitch of the elapsed sound of the chord is calculated (S4402).

  For example, in the BGM key being played (for example, C Major), the key tone (“C” in this example) matches the current chord (“C” in this example), and the previous beat If the pitch of the winning sound played in step 1 matches the root sound of the current chord (completely once) ("do" in the above example), Then, the pitch (“Le” in the above example) that is twice higher in length is calculated from the root sound of the chord.

  For the BGM key being played (for example, C Major), the key's main tone (“C” in this example) matches the current chord (“C” in this example), and playback is performed at the previous beat. If the pitch of the selected winning tone is three times higher than the root tone of the current chord (“mi” in the example above), the chord root From the sound, a complete pitch of 4 degrees ("F" in the above example) is calculated.

  In the BGM key being played (for example, C Major), the current chord is four times higher (“F” in this example) than the key's main tone (“C” in this example), and the previous beat If the pitch of the winning sound reproduced in step 1 matches the root sound of the current chord (completely once) ("F" in the above example), Then, a pitch (“So” in the above example) that is twice higher in length is calculated from the root sound of the chord.

  Also, in the BGM key being played (for example, C Major), the current chord is 4 degrees higher (“F” in this example) than the key tone (“C” in this example), and the If the pitch of the winning sound played with a beat of 3 is three times higher than the root sound of the current chord (“La” in the above example), Then, a pitch 4 degrees higher from the root sound of the chord (in the above example, “shi”) is calculated.

  Similarly to the processing of S4402 (FIG. 62), the processing of S4401 (FIG. 61) is the pitch of the winning sound reproduced with the previous beat read from the pitch information memory 223k by the processing of S2163 executed immediately before. Then, from the BGM key being reproduced and the current BGM code, the pitch of the winning sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the code is calculated (S4401).

  For example, in the BGM key being played (for example, C Major), the key tone (“C” in this example) matches the current chord (“C” in this example), and the previous beat If the pitch of the winning sound reproduced in step 1 matches the root sound of the current chord (completely once) ("do" in the above example), the pitch of the winning sound (component sound) that is pronounced at the current beat As a result, a pitch (“mi” in the above example) that is three degrees higher from the root sound of the chord is calculated. In other words, in this case, a winning sound is generated with the pitch of the root sound of the current chord in the previous beat, and a winning sound having a pitch twice higher than the root sound of the current chord is sounded in the immediately preceding back beat. In the current beat, a winning sound having a pitch three times higher than the root sound of the current chord is sounded (in the above example, the winning sounds are sounded in the order of “do” “re” “mi”).

  For the BGM key being played (for example, C Major), the key's main tone (“C” in this example) matches the current chord (“C” in this example), and playback is performed at the previous beat. When the pitch of the selected winning tone is three times higher than the root tone of the current chord (“mi” in the above example), the pitch of the winning tone (component tone) that is pronounced at the current beat is A pitch of 5 degrees (“So” in the above example) is calculated from the root sound. In other words, in this case, a winning sound with a pitch that is three times higher from the root tone of the current chord is pronounced in the previous beat, and a winning tone that is four times higher than the root tone of the current chord is immediately preceding the beat. Sounds are generated, and a winning sound with a pitch of 5 degrees higher than the root sound of the current chord is sounded at the current beat (in the above example, the winning sounds are sounded in the order of “Mi” “Fa” “So”) ).

  In the BGM key being played (for example, C Major), the current chord is four times higher (“F” in this example) than the key's main tone (“C” in this example), and the previous beat If the pitch of the winning sound reproduced in step 1 matches the root sound of the current chord (completely once) ("F" in the above example), the pitch of the winning sound (component sound) that is pronounced at the current beat As described above, a pitch (“La” in the above example) that is three degrees higher from the root sound of the chord is calculated. In other words, in this case, a winning sound having the pitch of the root sound of the current chord is generated in the previous beat, and a winning sound having a pitch twice higher than the root sound of the current chord is sounded in the immediately preceding back beat, A winning sound having a pitch three times higher than the root sound of the current chord is sounded at the current beat (in the above example, the winning sounds are sounded in the order of “Fa” “So” “La”).

  Also, in the BGM key being played (for example, C Major), the current chord is 4 degrees higher (“F” in this example) than the key tone (“C” in this example), and the If the pitch of the winning sound played at the current beat is 3 degrees higher than the root sound of the current chord (“La” in the above example), the pitch of the winning sound that is pronounced at the current beat (component sound) As a result, a pitch (“do” in the above example) that is 5 degrees higher than the root tone of the chord is calculated. In other words, in this case, a winning sound with a pitch that is three times higher from the root sound of the current chord is pronounced at the previous beat, and a winning sound with a pitch that is four degrees higher than the root sound of the current chord at the last back beat Sounds are generated, and a winning sound with a pitch of 5 degrees higher than the root sound of the current chord is sounded at the current beat (in the above example, the winning sounds are sounded in the order of “La”, “Shi”, “Do”) ).

  As described above, the pitch of the winning sound reproduced with the pitch of the elapsed sound of the chord is calculated from the pitch of the winning sound reproduced at the previous beat, the BGM key being played, and the current BGM chord. The scale (scale) determined according to the key set for the BGM can be calculated only by changing the pitch of the main sound according to the key. This is because the height relationship is always constant.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the same chord is generated at the timing of the subsequent beat of the BGM after sounding the incoming sound or the operation sound having the pitch of the constituent sound of the chord with the beat of a certain BGM. When the incoming sound or operation sound having the pitch of the elapsed sound of the sound is generated, and the incoming sound or operation sound having the same chord pitch as the pitch is generated at the next BGM beat timing, The pitch of the elapsed sound at the back beat and the pitch of the constituent sound at the next beat is calculated by calculation from the BGM key being played, the current BGM code, and the pitch of the first beat. The elapsed sound reproduction pitch setting table 222c provided in the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fourth embodiments can be made unnecessary. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, for each chord that can be taken by the BGM, the pitch of the constituent sound at the first beat, the elapsed sound at the back beat, and the pitch of the constituent sound at the next beat Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity required for the program ROM 222.

  Also in the fifth embodiment, in the sound editing / output process (see FIG. 27), the frame button operation sound output process (S2137) executed when an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is performed. The details are substantially the same as the start winning sound output processing (see FIGS. 61 and 62). Specifically, the start winning counter 223d used in the start winning sound output process is replaced with a frame button operation frequency counter 223f, and the sound to be generated is replaced with the operation sound from the winning sound. Become. By executing the frame button operation sound output processing, the same operational effects as the winning sound output by the start winning sound output processing can be achieved in the operation sound. That is, for each chord that can be taken by the BGM, it is necessary to store the pitch of the constituent sound at the first beat, the elapsed sound at the back beat, and the pitch of the constituent sound at the next beat in association with each other. Therefore, an increase in the storage capacity required for the program ROM 222 can be suppressed.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment can achieve the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 in the corresponding embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fourth embodiments. .

  The “3rd symbol” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “identification information” described in the claims and the following gaming machines, and the “variation display” described in the above embodiment is claimed. And “dynamic display of identification information” described in each of the following gaming machines.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed. For example, in each embodiment, a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the other embodiments are added to the embodiment or replaced with a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the embodiment. The embodiment may be modified and configured. The numerical values given in the above embodiments are merely examples, and other numerical values can naturally be adopted.

  For example, in each of the above-described embodiments, when a ball wins the first start port 64 while the time-saving BGM is being played back as a BGM, the winning is stocked and a winning sound for notifying the winning is generated. The case of sounding at the timing of the BGM for the time-shortening or the backbeat has been described. However, the sounding at the timing of the BGM or the backbeat for the winning sound is not necessarily limited to the time when the beat of the time-shortening BGM is being reproduced. However, the sound of the winning sound may be generated for any BGM at the timing of the BGM beat, back beat, or the like. As a result, the winning sound is pronounced in time with the beat of the BGM, etc., so that a sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically on the BGM rhythm, so that the player's feelings about the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in games can be enhanced.

  In addition, when a ball wins a special winning opening (large opening) 65a while the jackpot effect is being performed, the winning sound is stocked and a winning sound for notifying the winning is sent to the BGM for the jackpot effect. You may sound at the timing of the beat or back beat. As a result, the joy of winning a lot of winning balls by winning the special winning opening 65a during the jackpot presentation period is further enhanced by the winning sound that is pronounced according to the rhythm of the BGM. Can be more satisfied. Further, by changing the pitch of the winning sound by the method described in the above embodiments, a melody that matches the chord progression of the jackpot effect BGM can be played with the winning sound. Therefore, the player's satisfaction can be further enhanced by this melody.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the entrance to the first entrance 64 is continuously performed, or when the operation of the frame button 22 is continued, the stock stocked at the timing of the back beat of the BGM. The number of balls or the number of operations is 2 or more, there is a sound of an incoming sound or operation sound at the timing of the immediately preceding beat, and the BGM code at the timing of the BGM's back beat and the timing of the immediately following BGM's beat The case where the incoming sound or the operation sound with the elapsed sound of the chord as a pitch is pronounced on the condition that the BGM chord matches with the above has been described. Then, an incoming sound or operation sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord that is pronounced at the timing of the back beat of the BGM, and an input sound whose pitch is the constituent sound of the chord that is pronounced at the timing of the immediately preceding BGM beat A melody played by the incoming sound or the operation sound is obtained by sandwiching the incoming sound or the operation sound with the incoming sound or the operation sound whose pitch is the constituent sound of the chord generated at the timing of the beat of the BGM immediately after. The case where the player is given an impression that is in line with the BGM code has been described. On the other hand, when the entrance to the first entrance 64 is continuously performed, or when the operation of the frame button 22 is continued, the number of entrances stocked at the timing of the back beat of the BGM. Or, if the number of operations is two or more and there is a sound of an incoming sound or operation sound at the timing of the immediately preceding beat, the BGM code at the timing of the BGM's back beat and the BGM at the timing of the immediately following BGM's beat Regardless of whether or not the chord matches, the incoming sound or the operation sound having the elapsed sound as the pitch may be generated at the timing of the back beat of the BGM. In this case, the pitch of the incoming sound or the operation sound that is generated at the timing of the immediately following BGM beat is changed from the constituent sounds of the BGM chord at that timing to the pitch of the previous beat (the previous beat). If the pitch along the scale set according to the key of the BGM is selected on the basis of the pitch at the timing of the back beat (the elapsed sound of the chord at that time) Good. As a result, even if the chord passage sound at that time is selected as the pitch of the incoming sound or the operation sound and the chord is changed at the timing of the immediately following beat, a melody that does not feel uncomfortable along the chord progression of the BGM , Can be played by incoming sound or operation sound.

  In each of the above embodiments, not only the timing of the BGM beat but also the BGM's beat timing when the first entrance to the first entrance 64 is continuously performed or when the operation of the frame button 22 is continued. The case where the entrance sound or the operation sound is pronounced using the timing of the back beat has been described. On the other hand, the incoming sound or the operation sound may be generated not only at the BGM beat and the back beat but also at the timing of 1/4 of the BGM beat. Thereby, since a more complicated rhythm can be engraved by the incoming sound and the operation sound, the player can be more enjoyed by the incoming sound and the operation sound.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, for example, a case has been described in which a winning sound immediate reproduction effect is prepared for the pronunciation of the incoming sound when the time-saving BGM is being reproduced. That is, as a notice effect that suggests that the degree of expectation that will be a big hit is high, in the variable effect, the winning sound is not output at the timing of the BGM for the time-shortening or the back beat, but is entered into the first entrance 64. In the case where there is a ball, a case has been described in which an effect is provided in which an incoming ball sound is output at a predetermined pitch without waiting for the timing of the time-saving BGM or the back beat. In addition to the winning sound immediate reproduction effect or in place of the winning sound immediate reproduction effect, a winning sound shift continuous display may be prepared as a notice effect that suggests that the degree of expectation that is a big hit is high. That is, when there is a ball entering the first ball slot 64, it is slightly shifted from the timing of the beat or back beat of the time-shortening BGM, for example, 1/10 of the beat cycle, and the incoming sound is pronounced. You may prepare an effect to do. Isn't it possible to shift to a special game state called a jackpot by making the player feel a sense of discomfort by generating an incoming pitch sound that is out of time with the beat or back beat of the BGM for time reduction? Can have a strong expectation.

  In addition, for each of the above embodiments, an operation sound immediate reproduction effect or an operation sound deviation effect may be prepared for the operation sound. In other words, when the operation button 22 is operated while an effect requiring the operation button 22 is performed, the operation button 22 is operated instead of sounding the operation sound at the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat. In such a case, an effect may be provided in which an operation sound is immediately generated when the operation is performed. Alternatively, when the operation button 22 is operated while an effect requiring the operation button 22 is performed, the operation sound is slightly shifted from the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat, for example, 1 / of the beat cycle. An effect of generating an operation sound by shifting by 10 may be provided. Even though the player who operates the frame button 22 thought that the operation sound was generated at the timing of the BGM beat or back beat, the operation sound was immediately generated when the frame button 22 was operated. If the operation sound is generated out of time with the beat or backbeat of the BGM, it is possible to have a strong expectation that it will shift to a special gaming state called a big hit, 22 operations can be performed while enjoying the operation.

  In addition, the above-mentioned winning sound immediate reproduction effect, the effect that the winning sound is generated by shifting from the timing of the beat or back beat of the time-saving BGM, or the operation sound immediate reproduction effect or the operation sound deviation effect described above can be varied. You may make it perform as one aspect | mode of what is called a continuous notice production | presentation performed continuously over production. For example, when the first random number counter C1 acquired with a certain start winning is an indication of a big hit, the above winning sound immediate reproduction effect is obtained for all the variable effects held at that time. Alternatively, an effect of causing the winning sound to be generated while being shifted from the timing of the time BGM beat or the back beat, or an operation sound immediate reproduction effect or an operation sound deviation effect may be executed. Accordingly, when there is a ball entering the first ball slot 64 or when the frame button 22 is operated across a plurality of variation effects, the timing of the beat or back beat of the time-saving BGM is not waited. In addition, it is possible to output a pitching sound or operation sound at a predetermined pitch, or to generate a winning sound or operation sound that is shifted from the timing of the beat or back beat of the time-shortening BGM. More sounds and operation sounds can be heard by the player, and the player can recognize a large number of game variations.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a winning sound or operation sound generated at the timing of the BGM beat or back beat is stored, and when the big hit occurs, the stored winning sound or operation sound is reproduced during the big hit effect. You may make it do. Accordingly, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of superiority with respect to the jackpot while listening to the melody based on the played winning sound or operation sound. In addition, when the player operates the frame button 22 after the game ends, the QR code (registered trademark) including the stored winning sound and operation sound information is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player The QR code may be photographed with a camera-equipped mobile phone and registered in a predetermined server. And when a player plays a game with a pachinko machine of the same model, the winning sound and the operation sound registered in the server are generated by inputting the password acquired from the predetermined server to the pachinko machine. You may be able to play it when you do. Thereby, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of superiority with respect to the jackpot by listening to the melody based on the winning sound and the operation sound reproduced in the past. In each of the above embodiments, the winning sound or the operation sound is generated at the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat, the pitch of the winning sound or the operation sound to be generated is determined according to the BGM code, or The function of determining the pitch of the winning sound and operation sound using the elapsed sound of the code may be executed only when the password acquired from the predetermined server is input to the pachinko machine. . Thereby, since such a function can be provided only to a specific player, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player by giving a special effect of the production.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the audio lamp control device 113 has been described with respect to the case where the hold ball number command for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 without delay when the value of the hold ball number counter 223a is updated. In the sound lamp control device 113, information with the updated value of the held ball number counter 223a is stocked, and the updated value of the held ball number counter 223a is displayed and controlled at the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM. A display reserved ball number command for notifying the device 114 may be transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, the display control device 114 displays the retained ball number symbol corresponding to the updated retained ball number in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the BGM beat or back beat. That is, the addition / deletion of the number of reserved balls is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can play a rhythmic game.

  In addition, when the incoming sound is pronounced at the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat, at least as long as the incoming sound is pronounced at such timing, at the timing when the incoming sound is produced, A display reserved ball number command indicating the value of the held ball number counter 223 a may be transmitted to the display control device 114. Accordingly, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the updated reserved ball number is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 together with the sound of the incoming ball sound, so that the player can play a more rhythmic game. Can be done.

  Further, in the third and fourth embodiments, when the display lamp control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command from the audio lamp control device 113, the display lamp control device 114 is indicated by the display reserved ball number command without delay. The case where the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 has been described. However, the display lamp control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command from the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, after waiting for the timing of the BGM beat or back beat being managed in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display reserved ball number command is the third pattern. You may display on the small area | region Ds1 of the display apparatus 81. FIG. As a result, the addition / disappearance of the number of reserved balls is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can play a rhythmic game.

  In the second and fourth embodiments, the case where the variation effect variation time is set in accordance with the BGM beat period and the variation effect ends at the BGM beat timing has been described. On the other hand, the variation effect variation time is set regardless of the BGM beat period, and at the timing of the BGM beat immediately before the end of the variation effect, the variation effect is apparently stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, display may be performed in which the third symbol is swung up and down until the original stop display timing comes. Thereby, it can be shown to the player that the variation effect in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is completed at the timing of the beat of BGM, and the impression that the variation effect is performed in accordance with the rhythm of BGM is adjusted to the player. be able to. In this case, the stop sound of the third symbol is also sounded when the change effect is apparently stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the BGM beat timing just before the end of the change effect. Also good. Thereby, it can be impressed more strongly to the player when the variation effect in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is completed at the timing of the beat of BGM.

  In the first and third embodiments, the case where BGM playback is started from the beginning when the BGM change timing has been described has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the time-saving BGM is being played back. When the reach occurs and the BGM for the reach is played back, the time-saving BGM is muted and continuously played in a mute state. After the reach is finished, the time-saving BGM is stopped together with the stop of the reach BGM playback. The output of the time-saving BGM may be resumed by releasing the mute. In this case, since the time-saving BGM continues to be reproduced while the reach BGM is being reproduced, the timer counter 223h that counts the BGM beat timing also counts while the time-shortening BGM is muted. Need to continue. As a result, even if the reach BGM is reproduced during the reproduction of the time-saving BGM, the timing of the beat or the back beat of the time-shortening BGM can be accurately determined. Further, when a reach occurs during playback of the time-saving BGM, when the reach BGM is played back, the playback of the time-shortening BGM is paused, and after the reach is finished, the playback of the reach BGM is stopped. The pause of the time-saving BGM may be released, and the playback may be resumed from the place where it was paused. In this case, the timer counter 223h that counts the beat timing of the BGM needs to keep holding the time-saving BGM while it is temporarily stopped. As a result, even if the reach BGM is reproduced during the reproduction of the time-saving BGM, the timing of the beat or the back beat of the time-shortening BGM can be accurately determined.

  In the first and third embodiments, when the BGM playback is started after the big hit, the BGM playback may be started together with the start of the variation effect. In this case, the variation time of the variation effect or the time when the variation effect provided between the variation effects when the variation effect is continuously performed is not a multiple of the BGM beat cycle. It may be set to. As a result, the variation effect is started at the timing of the beat of the BGM and ends at least until the number of times the change effect is held is zero, so that a rhythmic game in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM can be provided to the player.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where one first entrance 64 that starts a lottery lottery when a ball enters the game board 13 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited thereto. Instead, a plurality of (for example, two) first entrances may be provided in the game board 13 where entrances are detected independently and a big winning lottery is started. In this case, when there is a holding at each first entrance, the number of held balls command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 indicates which of the first entrances is holding. Information may be included. Moreover, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 313 when the fluctuation starts is included, information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by which first entrance is included. Good. Thus, in the sound lamp control device 113, when a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance and a received ball number command is received, the first ball indicated by the held ball number command is displayed. When the number of held balls is set in the held ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, the first ball opening port can be obtained by decrementing the number of held balls counter for the first ball entry indicated by the variation pattern command by one. The number of held balls can be counted every time.

  When a plurality of first entrances are provided, one first entrance is provided with a blade member that performs an expansion / reduction operation (or opening / closing operation), and the blade member is in an expanded state (or opened) The ball may easily enter when it is in the state), and it may be difficult to enter (or cannot enter) when the blade member is in the contracted state (or closed state). . At this time, at one first entrance, the blade member may be configured to be in an expanded state more easily than when the ventilation state is in the normal state when the gaming state is in a certain change state or in a short time state. On the other hand, the other first entrance may be a state where there is no blade member and the sphere is always easy to enter. In addition, in the case of winning a jackpot lottery as a result of entering the first entrance hole, if the jackpot lottery result resulting from entering the other entrance hall is a jackpot It may be configured such that a type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player (for example, a 15R probability variation jackpot) is more easily selected than the above. When the pachinko machine has these configurations, when the game state is normal, the player enters the ball into the other first entrance and puts the ball into the player so that many lottery lotteries are performed. When the game state is in the probabilistic state or the normal state, the ball member enters the first entrance where the blade member is likely to be in an expanded state, so that a jackpot of a type advantageous to the player is obtained, A player can fire a ball. Therefore, since it is possible to give variations to the way the game is played by the player, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, when a plurality of first entrances are provided, the variation effect held in correspondence with the entrance to one first entrance is the entrance to another first entrance. It may be executed with priority over the fluctuating effects held corresponding to In particular, when the jackpot lottery is performed as a result of the entrance to the first entrance, the type of jackpot advantageous to the player (for example, 15R probability variation jackpot) is easily selected. In the case of being configured, the variation effect that is put on hold corresponding to the first entrance to the first entrance is preferentially executed, so that an advantageous type of jackpot is given to the player. It can be easily granted. Therefore, a player's expectation can be enhanced.

  Further, when a plurality of first entrances are provided, if there is an entrance to all the first entrances, the entrance sound may be generated. At this time, regardless of which first entrance has entered, if there is an entrance, the entrance sound may be generated at the timing of BGM beat or back beat for each entry. Since the incoming sound is generated at the timing of many BGM beats or back beats, it is possible to make the player listen to a melody that is not delayed. On the other hand, the timing at which the incoming sound is generated when there is an incoming ball may be controlled for each first incoming port. That is, in this case, if a plurality of first entrances are entered at almost the same time, the entrance sound for each first entrance is produced at the same BGM beat or backbeat timing. At this time, the pitch of each incoming sound may be determined so as to sound a chord that matches the BGM chord at that time. As a result, it is possible to match the sound of music with the player, so that a more enjoyable game can be provided.

  When a plurality of first entrances are provided, the entrance sound may be generated only when a ball enters the one first entrance. If this one first entrance is configured such that, for example, a type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player (for example, 15R probability variation jackpot) is easily selected, the incoming sound is pronounced. In addition, the player can easily know that there is a ball in the first entrance where the type of jackpot advantageous to the player can be easily selected, and the expectation for the game can be increased. . In addition, the incoming sound is pronounced at the timing of the BGM beat or back beat, so that the expectation can be enhanced according to the incoming sound that is pronounced according to the rhythm of the BGM, and the player can play the game rhythmically. Can enjoy. In particular, in this embodiment, the sound of the incoming sound is generated when the gaming state is in the short-time state, but one first entrance is easier to enter the ball in the short-time state than in the normal state. When the player is in the short-time state, the player is in a state where he / she wants to know strongly whether or not a ball has entered the first entrance. Under such circumstances, while the time-saving BGM is being played, the player can play the one by making the incoming sound sound only when there is an incoming ball at the first first entrance. It can be known from the incoming sound that is generated at the pitch corresponding to the chord of the short-time BGM in accordance with the rhythm of the short-time BGM. Therefore, the player can raise the expectation with respect to a game, matching with the rhythm of BGM. Also, in this case, if the variation effect that is put on hold corresponding to the entrance to one first entrance is preferentially executed, the entrance to one first entrance is Since the corresponding fluctuating effects are digested more and more, the number of reserved balls is full, and it is unlikely that the ball that entered the first first entrance is invalidated without being held. In the present embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a holding ball number command from the main control device 110, the incoming sound is pronounced as if there was an incoming ball, and to the first entrance that was not put on hold. The incoming sound is not pronounced for the incoming ball. On the other hand, by making the incoming sound sound for the entrance to the first entrance where the change effect is executed with priority, the reserved change effect is continuously digested. The entrance to the first entrance is easily suspended, so that a lot of entrance sounds for the entrance to the first entrance can be pronounced. Therefore, the pronunciation by the incoming sound can be continuously performed, and the player can be entertained. On the other hand, the variation effect for entering the other first entrance is kept on hold until all the variation effects for entering the first entrance are executed. The fluctuating performance held for the mouth immediately reaches the maximum number of balls to be held, and there is a situation in which the holding is not reduced from there. Therefore, even if the incoming sound for the other first entrances is pronounced, there is an entrance to the other first entrances as long as the fluctuating effect for the maximum number of retained balls is kept on hold. However, since the incoming sound is not pronounced, it gives the player the impression that the melody due to the incoming sound is interrupted. On the other hand, if the incoming sound is generated only when a ball enters the first first entrance, such a situation can be suppressed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a held ball number command from the main control device 110, it is configured to sound a pitching sound when there is a pitching. That is, no incoming sound is generated for an incoming ball to the first incoming port 64 that has not been put on hold. On the other hand, when the main controller 110 detects a ball entering the first ball inlet 64, the main controller 110 confirms that the ball has entered the first ball inlet 64 regardless of whether the ball is put on hold. A command to be notified may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 may receive the command to temporarily stock the incoming ball and generate the incoming sound. As a result, although the incoming sound is pronounced even for an incoming ball that was not put on hold, the incoming sound is pronounced for more incoming balls, so a more complex rhythm And melody can be played by the incoming sound that is pronounced according to BGM. Therefore, the player can be more entertained.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the incoming sound and the operation sound are pronounced at the pitch corresponding to the BGM chord according to the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat has been described. Regardless of the beat or backbeat timing, it matched the BGM code at that time without delay when it was detected that the ball entered the first entrance 64 or that the frame button 22 was operated. A pitching sound or an operation sound may be generated at a pitch. As a result, a melody accompanied by BGM can be composed of an incoming sound or an operation sound and can be heard by the player. In addition, the melody differs depending on the timing of entering and operating, the number of entering and the number of operations. Therefore, the player can be entertained by various melodies that are played by the incoming sound or the operation sound depending on the time.

  In each of the above embodiments, the frame rate (frame update period) and the BGM tempo (beat period) in the third symbol display device 81 are not considered. However, in the above embodiment, for example, the frame update period in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is 20 milliseconds, whereas if the BGM tempo is 160 BPM, the beat period is 375 milliseconds. In the third symbol display device 81, there is a maximum deviation of 15 milliseconds between the frame update timing and the BGM beat timing. Generally, the difference between the image and the sound is not a problem as long as it is less than the frame update period. However, there may be a case where it is desired to display an image on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the beat timing of the BGM. In this case, for example, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the frame update timing in the third symbol display device 81, displays a predetermined effect image on the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of a certain beat, and adjusts accordingly. When a sound is generated, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 at the frame update timing that comes immediately after the beat timing, and the sound output LSI 301 responds to the display of the effect image. You may make it instruct | indicate the pronunciation of a sound. Thereby, although slightly deviating from the original BGM beat timing, it is possible to display a predetermined effect image on the third symbol display device 81 and output a sound corresponding to the display at almost the beat timing. Note that the frame update timing of the third symbol display device 81 in the voice lamp control device 113 is monitored by the voice lamp control device 113 with respect to the display control device 114 immediately after the power is turned on. After instructing the drive start of the device 81, the display control device 114 updates the frames to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at intervals of 20 milliseconds based on the instruction, while the sound lamp control device 113 This may be done by always counting 20 milliseconds from the instruction. Alternatively, the voice lamp control device 113 may receive a V interrupt signal from the display control device 114 to monitor the frame update timing in the third symbol display device 81 in the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, the BGM tempo may be changed to instruct the sound output LSI 301 to reproduce the BGM so that the BGM beat period is a multiple of the frame update period in the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the BGM tempo is 160 BPM, the sound output LSI 301 is instructed to output the BPM so that the BGM tempo is 157.9 BPM so that the beat period is, for example, 380 milliseconds. May be. As a result, the frame update timing in the 3rd symbol display device 81 and the BGM beat timing can always be matched, so that the image can be displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in exact alignment with the BGM beat timing. Can be displayed. Further, if the BGM tempo is determined so that the BGM beat period is the closest value to the original BGM beat period among the multiples of the frame update period in the third symbol display device 81, the BGM Since the tempo does not change significantly, the player can listen to the BGM without a sense of incongruity.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, initial values are set in various flags and memories provided in the RAM 223 during the startup process executed in the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. The case of setting (S1810 in FIG. 23) and initialization has been described. That is, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the operation of the sound lamp control device 113 is always started from the initial state when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off and then turned on again has been described. On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main controller 110 causes the game state of the pachinko machine 10 that is backed up in the main controller 110 (normal state, probability change state, time-short state, etc.) Then, the number of reserved balls is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a command, and the voice lamp control device 113 sets a value in various flags and memories provided in the RAM 223 in accordance with the command received from the main control device 110. You may do it. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 performs sound output and lamp output reflecting the state backed up by the main control device 110 immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. On the other hand, it is possible to instruct the third symbol display device 81 to display an image reflecting the state backed up by the main control device 110. Therefore, for example, when a momentary power failure occurs, the sound output, the lamp output, and the image display on the third symbol display device 81 are performed from the state immediately before the power failure. Can continue.

  In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 114 has been described with respect to the case where a display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, Display data table is prepared for each element such as “Fluctuation start-up”, “High-speed fluctuation”, “Notice effect”, “Normal reach”, “Super reach”, and according to the fluctuation pattern indicated in the display fluctuation pattern command After identifying the elements necessary for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the elements necessary for the identified variation effect are combined into one, and a final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may make it do. In many cases, “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like are displayed in common to each change pattern. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by making the variation effect as elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every image display interval (one 20 ms in each of the above embodiments) for completing the drawing process. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image of one frame. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that images for one frame are always displayed at regular time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By transmitting, it is possible to keep accurate even without measuring the time interval.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the image controller 237 specifies a frame buffer in which a rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and an image first developed from the other frame buffer. The case where information is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and every time the image controller 237 receives a drawing list, a frame on which a drawn image is to be developed Alternatively, the buffers may be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Each time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the demonstration effect is to stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered from “0” to “9”. Alternatively, a third symbol composed of a main symbol with numbers or a main symbol without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Moreover, you may display a character and back image completely different from the 3rd pattern and back image used by a variable display.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the display data table has been described with respect to the case where the content (drawing content) of the image to be drawn at that time is specified corresponding to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit. The display contents are not limited to those described above, and any display contents may be defined as long as they are defined at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30 second. Since an image of one frame is displayed every time, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 second interval.

  Further, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. I manage the address. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation that scrolls all the symbols Z1 to Z3 so fast that the player cannot visually recognize the high-speed variation is described. Thus, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so that they cannot be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the value of the held ball number counter 223a is decreased by 1 when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 has been described. Not. For example, in the variation process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 subtracted in accordance with the variation pattern command being set by the variation start process (S1207). A reserved ball number command is set so as to be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. Good. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the number of held balls held by the main control device 110 more accurately.

  In each of the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the display instruction is given from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. The command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device is connected to the display control device, and a command for instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp from the display control device, or a command for starting the operation of an accessory, You may comprise so that it may transmit to a control apparatus. At this time, the display control device determines a detailed variation pattern based on the command received directly from the main control device 110, and based on the detailed variation pattern, from the display control device to the sound lamp control device, You may transmit the command which instruct | indicates the output of each audio | voice, lighting / flashing of a lamp | ramp, and operation start of a movable accessory. At this time, the timing of the BGM beats and back beats is managed by the display control device, and at the timing of the BGM beats and back beats, the output of each sound to the sound lamp control device, the lamp A command for instructing lighting / flashing of, and start of operation of the movable accessory may be transmitted.

  Furthermore, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed. When the sound lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, a flag is generated instead of the command generated by the sound lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114, and based on the flag, The display data table may be set in the display data table buffer 233a, or various image data such as a warning image may be generated. Further, instead of the display type command generated by the display control device 114 and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, a display type flag is generated, and based on the display type flag, output of sound, lighting / flashing of the lamp, The operation of the first accessory 87 may be controlled.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, it is configured that the winning at the first entrance 64 and the passing of the ball to the through gate 67 are each held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of balls held is 4 times. However, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

  In addition, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the fluctuating effect that is a kind of dynamic display is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying the symbols along a predetermined path such as a horizontal direction or an L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example. In the slot machine, for example, the fluctuation of the symbol after the operation lever is operated is started at the timing of the beat of the BGM, and the sound is pronounced at the start of the fluctuation, so that the rhythm of the BGM It is possible to provide players with a game that matches the game. In addition, when a coin is inserted, a setting sound when a bet number is set by operating a bet button for setting a bet number from previously stored coins instead of inserting a coin. However, it is possible to provide a player with a game that matches the rhythm of the BGM by generating a sound at the timing of the beat of the BGM.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

  Dynamic display execution comprising: determination means for determining when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information based on a determination result by the determination means A period during which at least a player plays a game in a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means Output means for outputting music, determination means for determining the timing of the beats of the music output by the output means, and an effect of performing effects in accordance with the timing of the beats of the music determined by the determination means And a game machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, determination is performed by the determination unit triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and based on the determination result, dynamic display of identification information on the display unit is executed by the dynamic display execution unit. The When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player, thereby giving the player interest. Here, the music is output by the output means at least during the period in which the game is being played by the player. The timing of the beat of the music output by this output means is determined by the determination means. Then, the effect is executed by the effect execution means in accordance with the timing of the music beat determined by the determination means. As a result, the performance is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the music, so that the player can play the game according to the rhythm of the music, and can enhance the interest in the game.

  In the gaming machine A1, with the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game, the gaming machine A1 includes setting means for setting the sound of a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event, and the effect executing means is set by the setting means The game machine A2 is a sounding means for sounding the notification sound in accordance with the beat timing of the music determined by the determining means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, with the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game as a trigger, the sounding of the notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event is set by the setting means. Then, the set notification sound is generated by the sound generation means in accordance with the timing of the music beat determined by the determination means. That is, in order to notify the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game, a notification sound is generated in synchronism with the timing of the beat of the music that is output at least during the game being played by the player. As a result, the notification sound is pronounced in accordance with the rhythm of the music, so that the player can play the game according to the rhythm of the music and can enhance the interest in the game.

  The gaming machine A2 includes at least a main control unit that controls a game, the output unit, the determination unit, and the sound generation unit, and controls sound output based on a command from the main control unit Control means, wherein the sound control means comprises acquisition means for obtaining the beat period of the music output by the output means, and the judgment means starts outputting the music by the output means. A timing of music beats output by the output means on the basis of the passage of time since then and the period of beats of the music acquired by the acquisition means Machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, the game is controlled by the main control means, and the sound output is controlled by the sound control means based on the command from the main control means. The sound control means has at least output means, determination means, and sound generation means. Here, the beat period of the music output by the output means is acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the passage of time after the output of the music by the output means and the period of the beat of the music acquired by the acquisition means, the timing of the music beats output by the output means is determined by the determination means It is judged by. Then, the notification sound set by the setting means is generated by the sound generation means in accordance with the beat timing of the music determined here. In this way, the output of music, the acquisition of the beat period of the output music, the determination of the timing of the beat of the output music, and the pronunciation of the notification sound at the timing of the music beat based on the determination Is performed in the sound control means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to accurately determine the timing of the beat of the music and to notify the notification sound in accordance with the accurately determined timing of the beat of the music.

  In the gaming machine A2, main control means for controlling a game, display control means for controlling display on the display means based on a command from the main control means, the output means, the determination means, and the sound generation Sound control means for controlling sound output based on a command from the main control means and a command from the display control means, and the display control means comprises the main control means Output start determination means for determining the start of the music output by the output means based on a command from the output means, and when the output start determination means determines the start of the music output by the output means, Transmitting means for transmitting an instruction command for instructing start of music output to the sound control means, and output opening by the instruction command transmitted by the transmitting means. Acquisition means for acquiring the beat period of the music instructed, the passage of time since the instruction command was transmitted by the transmission means, and the beat period of the music acquired by the acquisition means Based on the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, and a notification means for notifying the sound control means of the timing of the beat, the determination means comprising: A gaming machine A4, which determines the timing of beats of music output by the output means based on the notification of the timing of beats.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game is controlled by the main control means, and the display on the display means is controlled by the display control means based on the command from the main control means. The sound output is controlled by the sound control means based on the command from the main control means and the command from the display control means. In the sound control means, the sound output is controlled based on the command from the display control means, so that the sound can be easily output in accordance with the image displayed on the display means. The sound control means has at least output means, determination means, and sound generation means. Here, in the display control means, based on the command from the main control means, the start of music output by the output means is judged by the output start judgment means. When the output start determination means determines the start of music output by the output means, an instruction command for instructing the start of music output is transmitted to the sound control means by the transmission means of the display control means. In addition, the beat period of the music whose start of output is instructed by the instruction command transmitted by the transmitting unit is acquired by the acquiring unit of the display control unit. Then, based on the passage of time after the instruction command is transmitted by the transmission means and the period of the music beat acquired by the acquisition means, the timing of the music beats output by the output means is determined. The sound control means is notified of the timing of the beat by the notifying means. The judgment means of the sound control means judges the timing of the music beat output by the output means based on the notification of the timing of the music beat from the notification means. Then, the notification sound set by the setting means is generated by the sound generation means in accordance with the beat timing of the music determined here. Thus, the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means is judged by the display control means and notified to the sound control means, so that an image that matches the beat timing output by the output means is displayed on the display means. While being displayed, a notification sound can be generated in accordance with the timing of the beat. Therefore, the notification sound can be output in accordance with the rhythm while showing the player an image that matches the rhythm of the BGM. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be entertained through the video and the sound while being put on the music rhythm output by the output means.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, a bet number setting unit for setting a predetermined game value as a bet number is provided, and the predetermined start condition is a state in which the bet number is set by the bet number setting unit. The starting means that can be operated by the player is operated, and when the betting number is set by the betting number setting means, the setting means A gaming machine A5, which sets a notification sound for notifying the setting.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the following effects are produced. That is, a determination is made by the determination means with a predetermined start condition that the start operation means is operated by the player in a state where the predetermined game value is set as the bet number by the betting number setting means, and the identification information The dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means. At this time, when the betting number is set by the betting number setting means, a notification sound for notifying the setting of the betting number is set by the setting means. As a result, the set notification sound is pronounced by the sound generation means in accordance with the beat timing of the music determined by the determination means, that is, the fact that the bet number is set matches the music rhythm. Therefore, the player can recognize the sound generated by the notification sound that is pronounced and can play the game according to the rhythm of the music, and can increase the interest in the game.

  Dynamic display execution comprising: determination means for determining when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information based on a determination result by the determination means In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined gaming value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, provided on the gaming board and the gaming board A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area, a detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball when the game ball passes through a predetermined area provided in the game area, and a detection means A payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls to the player when the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area is detected, and an output means for outputting music at least during a period in which the game is being played by the player; Its out A means for judging the timing of the beat of the music output by the means, and for detecting the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area based on the detection means detecting the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area Setting means for setting the pronunciation of the notification sound, and sounding means for generating the notification sound set by the setting means in accordance with the beat timing of the music determined by the determination means. Characteristic gaming machine B1.

  According to the gaming machine B1, determination is performed by a determination unit triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and based on the determination result, dynamic display of identification information on the display unit is executed by the dynamic display execution unit. The When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player, thereby giving the player interest. When the game ball is launched by the launching means toward the game area provided on the game board and the game ball passes through a predetermined area provided in the game area, the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means. When the passage of game balls in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player by the payout means. Also, music is output by the output means at least during a period in which a game is being played by the player. The timing of the beat of the music output by this output means is determined by the determination means. On the other hand, based on the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area detected by the detection means, the sounding of the notification sound for notifying the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area is set by the setting means. Then, the set notification sound is generated by the sound generation means in accordance with the timing of the music beat determined by the determination means. In other words, when a game ball launched toward the game area passes through a predetermined area provided in the game area, a notification sound for notifying the passage is at least during a period in which the game is being played by the player It is pronounced according to the beat timing of the output music. As a result, a notification sound that also means payout of the game ball is pronounced in accordance with the rhythm of the music, so the player can listen to the notification sound that also means payout of the game ball while riding on the rhythm of the music. , Can increase the fun of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest for the game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine B1, in addition to the timing of the music beat output by the output means, the determination means also determines the timing of the equally divided positions when the beat is divided into a plurality of equal parts, The sound generation means is the notification sound in which the sound generation is set by the setting means, and when the number of unsound notification sound is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, A gaming machine B2 that uses the timing to generate the notification sound.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in addition to the beat timing of the music output by the output means, the timing of the equally divided positions when the beats are equally divided is determined by the determination means. Further, when the notification sound is set to be sounded by the setting means and the number of unsounded notification sounds is a predetermined number or more, the timing of the equally divided position determined by the determination means is also used. The notification sound is generated by the sound generation means. As a result, when a large number of game balls pass through a predetermined area of the game board, not only the timing of the music beat but also the timing of the equally divided position when the beat is subdivided into equal numbers Is pronounced, so a more complicated rhythm can be carved with the notification sound. Therefore, the more complicated the rhythm is carved, the more the game balls are passing through the predetermined area, that is, more game balls are paid out. Therefore, for the music output from the output means, the informing sound engraves a complicated rhythm so that the player can be entertained by the rhythm and that a lot of game balls are paid out to the player. There is an effect that it can be easily notified.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the establishment of the predetermined starting condition includes a case where the passage of the gaming ball in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means, the predetermined start condition is satisfied, so the determination is performed by the determination means, and the identification information is displayed on the display means based on the determination result. The dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Thereby, not only the game balls are paid out, but also the notification sound that means the dynamic display of the identification information that leads to the provision of the predetermined game value is pronounced according to the rhythm of the music. Listening to music while listening to the rhythm of the music can increase the expectation of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest for the game can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the detection means is provided in the gaming area, and the gaming ball passes through an area configured to allow the gaming ball to pass only during a period in which a predetermined gaming value is given to the player. A gaming machine B4 that detects the passage of the game ball when it passes.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are produced. That is, when a game ball passes through an area that is provided in the game area and is configured to allow the game ball to pass only during a period in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, the passage of the game ball is detected by the detecting means. Detected by. Based on the detection of the passage of the game ball in this area by the detection means, the sounding of the notification sound for notifying the passage of the game ball is set by the setting means. Then, the set notification sound is generated by the sound generation means in accordance with the timing of the music beat determined by the determination means. In this way, during the period in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, when the game ball passes through an area where the game ball can pass only during that period, the notification sound is generated in accordance with the rhythm of the music. Is done. Since this notification sound notifies the passage of the game ball to a special area during a period in which a predetermined game value is given, the player listens with joy while matching the notification sound to the rhythm of the music. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be enhanced.

  Dynamic display execution comprising: determination means for determining when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information based on a determination result by the determination means A period during which at least a player plays a game in a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means An output means for outputting music, and a sound generation means for generating a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event triggered by the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game. The pitch of the notification sound to be generated based on the chord specified by the chord specifying means, Gaming machine C1, characterized in that it comprises a pitch determining means for constant, the.

  According to the gaming machine C1, determination is performed by the determination means triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and based on the determination result, dynamic display of identification information on the display means is executed by the dynamic display execution means. The When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player, thereby giving the player interest. Also, music is output by the output means at least during a period in which a game is being played by the player. On the other hand, triggered by the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game, a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event is generated by the sound generation means. At this time, the chord of the music at the timing when the notification sound is generated is specified by the code specifying means, and the pitch of the notification sound to be generated is determined by the pitch determining means based on the specified code. As a result, the notification sound is not only pronounced according to the rhythm of the music, but is also pronounced at a pitch that matches the chord progression of the music. Therefore, a melody that matches the music is played by the notification sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest for the game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine C1, the pitch determining means determines the pitch of the notification sound to be generated from the constituent sounds constituting the chord specified by the chord specifying means. .

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, since the pitch of the notification sound to be generated is determined by the pitch determination means from the constituent sounds constituting the chord specified by the chord specifying means, the notification sound is formed as a chord and a chord of music. It is pronounced with a pitch. Therefore, a pleasant melody that composes music and chords can be played with the notification sound, and the player can be entertained.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, when the chord specified by the chord specifying means is changed to a new chord at the timing, the pitch determining means A gaming machine C3, wherein a root sound of the chord is determined as a pitch.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are produced. That is, when a chord is specified by the chord specifying means, if the specified chord is changed to a new chord at that timing, the pitch of the notification sound to be generated at that timing is set as the pitch of the notification sound. The root sound is determined by the pitch determining means. When a sound having a pitch other than the root sound of the chord is output as a notification sound at the timing of the beat when the music chord is changed, the player recognizes the notification sound as a sound deviating from the chord, and the player May make you feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, it is possible to make the player listen to the notification sound as a sound that matches the changed code by generating a notification sound with the root sound as the pitch. Therefore, there is an effect that a sound that is comfortable for the player can be heard.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the chord specifying means, together with the chord of the music at the timing of making the sound, the chord of the music at the timing at which the notification sound is pronounced before the timing of making the sound And the chord of the music at the timing when the notification sound is generated after the timing of the sound generation, and the pitch determining means is such that each of the chords specified by the chord specifying means is the same code. Yes, if the pitch of the notification sound generated before the sounding timing is the constituent sound of the chord, the elapsed sound of the chord is determined as the pitch of the notification sound sounded at this timing A gaming machine C4 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are produced. That is, together with the music chord at the timing of sounding this time, the music chord at the timing when the notification sound is pronounced before the timing of sounding and the sound of the notification sound are made after the timing of sounding. The chord of the music at the timing is determined by the chord specifying means. If the specified chords are all the same chord and the pitch of the notification sound generated before the sounding timing is the component sound of the chord, the notification sound to be sounded at this timing As the pitch, the elapsed sound of the chord is determined by the pitch determining means. In this way, the notification sound is accompanied with the music by causing the notification sound to be pronounced while inserting the notification sound having the pitch of the chord passage sound in addition to the notification sound having the pitch of the music constituting the music chord. Variations can be added to the melody of the sound. Therefore, the melody based on the notification sound does not become monotonous, and there is an effect that voice output that does not bore the player can be performed.

  In the gaming machine C4, the pitch determination means uses the constituent sound of the chord as the pitch of the notification sound at the timing when the notification sound is generated after the generation timing of the notification sound with the elapsed sound as the pitch. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, the pitch of the notification sound at the timing at which the notification sound is generated after the generation timing of the notification sound with the elapsed sound as the pitch is configured as the chord configuration. The sound is determined by the pitch determining means. As a result, the notification sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord is generated by being sandwiched between the notification sounds whose pitch is the constituent sound of the chord, so the notification sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord is generated. Even in such a case, there is an effect that the player can listen to the melody played by the notification sound as if it was in the chord of the music without feeling uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine C4 or C5, the pitch determining means is such that each of the chords identified by the chord identifying means is the same chord, and the pitch of the notification sound that is pronounced before the timing of sounding is If it is a constituent sound of a chord, the pitch of the elapsed sound is calculated as the pitch of the notification sound to be generated at this timing based on the chord, the pitch of the constituent sound, and the main tone of the music A gaming machine C6, which is calculated from the above.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4 or C5, the following effects are produced. That is, each chord identified by the chord identifying means, that is, a music chord at the timing of sound generation, a music chord at a timing when the notification sound is pronounced before the sounding timing, and a timing of the sounding In the case where the chord of the music at the timing when the notification sound is generated later is the same chord, and the pitch of the notification sound generated before the sounding timing is the constituent sound of the chord, Based on the chord, the pitch of the constituent sound, and the main tone of the music, the pitch determination means calculates the pitch of the elapsed sound as the pitch of the notification sound to be generated at this timing. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a table for determining the elapsed sound in association with the chord of the music, the pitch of the constituent sound that was pronounced before, and the main tone of the music in order to determine the elapsed sound. The memory area for storing the table becomes unnecessary. Therefore, there is an effect that an increase in the storage capacity of the memory can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, a gaming ball has a gaming board, launching means for launching a gaming ball toward the gaming area provided on the gaming board, and a predetermined area provided in the gaming area. Detecting means for detecting the passage of the game ball when it passes, and payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls to the player when the detection means detects the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area; The sound generation means generates a notification sound for notifying the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area on the basis of the detection of the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area by the detection means. A gaming machine C7 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the following effects are produced. That is, when a game ball is launched by the launching means toward the game area provided on the game board and the game ball passes through a predetermined area provided in the game area, the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means. The When the passage of game balls in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player by the payout means. In addition, based on the detection of the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area by the detection means, a sound for notifying the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area is generated by the sound generation means. At this time, the chord of the music at the timing when the notification sound is generated is specified by the code specifying means, and the pitch of the notification sound to be generated is determined by the pitch determining means based on the specified code. Thus, every time a game ball passes through a predetermined area where a predetermined number of game balls are to be paid out by the payout means, the notification sound is generated with a pitch that matches the chord progression of the music. Therefore, the melody that matches the chord progression of the music played by the notification sound has an effect that the player can further enhance the joy of paying out the game ball.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, a judgment means for judging the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, and an occurrence of the event triggered by the progress of the game Setting means for setting the sound generation of the notification sound, and the sound generation means sounds the notification sound set by the setting means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determination means. C8 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the following effects are produced. That is, the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means is determined by the determination means. Also, triggered by the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game, the setting means sets the sound of the notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event. Then, the set notification sound is generated by the sound generation means in accordance with the timing of the music beat determined by the determination means. In other words, the notification sound is generated in synchronism with the timing of the beat of the music that is output during at least the period in which the game is being played by the player. As a result, the melody that matches the rhythm and chord of the music is played by the notification sound, so that the player has the effect of increasing the fun of the game.

  Dynamic display execution comprising: determination means for determining when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information based on a determination result by the determination means A period during which at least a player plays a game in a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means Output means for outputting music and display control for controlling display of a new image, stop of the image, or deletion of the image on the display means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means And a gaming machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, determination is performed by the determination means triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and based on the determination result, dynamic display of identification information on the display means is executed by the dynamic display execution means. The When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player, thereby giving the player interest. Here, the music is output by the output means at least during the period in which the game is being played by the player. The display control means controls the display means to display a new image, stop the image, or erase the image in accordance with the timing of the music beat output by the output means. That is, a new image is displayed on the display unit in accordance with the rhythm of the music output by the output unit, the image is stopped, or the image is deleted. Thereby, since the image displayed on the display means can be visually recognized according to the rhythm of the music, the player can play the game according to the rhythm of the music and can enhance the interest in the game. is there.

  In the gaming machine D1, the display control means simulates the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means at least once in accordance with the timing of the music beat output by the output means. A game machine D2 that performs control to stop and display automatically.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in accordance with the timing of the music beat output by the output means, the display control means controls the dynamic display execution means to dynamically stop and display the identification information being executed once or more. Done. As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is integrated with the rhythm of the music, and while the pseudo stop display is repeated, for example, the player can be shown an effect that increases the expectation level that is a big hit, Along with the rhythm of music, you can enhance your interest in gaming. In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense that the dynamic display of the identification information is also performed in accordance with the rhythm of the music, so that the rhythmic game can be performed, and the interest of the player is improved. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, under the control of the display control means, setting means for setting a sound to be generated in accordance with the display of a new image, the stop of the image, or the deletion of the image performed by the display means; A game machine D3, comprising: sounding means for sounding the sound set by the setting means in accordance with the beat timing of the music output from the output means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are produced. That is, under the control of the display control means, a sound to be sounded in accordance with the display of a new image, the stop of the image, or the deletion of the image performed by the display means is set by the setting means. Then, the set sound is pronounced by the sound generation means in accordance with the beat timing of the music output from the output means. Thereby, in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, a new image is displayed on the display means, the image is stopped, or the image is erased, and the sound corresponding thereto is also output. The sound is generated in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the means. Therefore, in addition to visually recognizing the image displayed on the display means according to the rhythm of the music, it is possible to listen to the sound as well, so that the player can play the game according to the rhythm of the music, There is an effect that the interest for the game can be enhanced.

  Dynamic display execution comprising: determination means for determining when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information based on a determination result by the determination means A period during which at least a player plays a game in a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means Output means for outputting music, and the dynamic display execution means is invisible in the dynamic display of the identification information in accordance with the timing of the music beat output by the output means A gaming machine E1 comprising start means for starting a state.

  According to the gaming machine E1, determination is performed by the determination unit triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and based on the determination result, dynamic display of identification information on the display unit is executed by the dynamic display execution unit. The When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player, thereby giving the player interest. Here, the music is output by the output means at least during the period in which the game is being played by the player. In accordance with the timing of the music beat to be output, the start means starts the state where the identification information is not visible in the dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, it is possible to show the player that the dynamic display of the identification information is started at the timing of the music beat, and the game is performed as if the dynamic display of the identification information is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the music. I can make a person. Therefore, the player can play the game according to the rhythm of the music, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine E1, the start means, when the start timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the music beat, the identification information from the start timing to the timing of the music beat. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that it is dynamically displayed in a visually recognizable state, and that the identification information invisible state in the dynamic display of the identification information is started in accordance with the beat timing of the music.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the start timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the music beat, the identification information is dynamically displayed in a visible state from the start timing to the timing of the music beat. In accordance with the timing of the beat, the starting means executes the dynamic display of the identification information so as to start the invisible state of the identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information. As a result, even if the start timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the music beat, the player seems to have started the dynamic display of the identification information in accordance with the timing of the music beat. Can show. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to feel that the dynamic display of the identification information is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the music.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the dynamic display execution means includes stop display execution means for executing stop display in the dynamic display of the identification information in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. A gaming machine E3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the following effects are produced. That is, stop display in the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the stop display execution means in accordance with the beat timing of the music output by the output means. Therefore, it is possible to show the player that the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed at the timing of the music beat, and the dynamic display of the identification information is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the music. You can make a player. Therefore, the player can play the game according to the rhythm of the music, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine E3, the stop display execution unit dynamically displays the identification information at the timing of the music beat when the stop display timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the music beat. The game machine E4 is characterized in that the display of the identification information is displayed in a pseudo manner, and then the identification information is dynamically displayed in a visible state, and then the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed at the stop display timing. .

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the stop display timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the music beat, the dynamic display of the identification information is pseudo-stopped at the music beat timing, and then the identification information is visually recognized. After the dynamic display is performed in a possible state, the stop display execution unit executes the dynamic display of the identification information so that the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed at the stop display timing. Thereby, even if the stop display timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the music beat, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed in accordance with the music beat timing. It can look like Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to feel that the dynamic display of the identification information is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the music.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the state where the identification information is invisible in the dynamic display of the identification information, which is started by the start unit in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output unit, The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the identification information is dynamically displayed at a high speed.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the following effects are produced. That is, in accordance with the timing of the music beat, high-speed dynamic display of the identification information is started by the starting means. Therefore, it is possible to show the player that the dynamic display of the identification information is started at the timing of the music beat, and the game is performed as if the dynamic display of the identification information is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the music. I can make a person. Therefore, the player can play the game according to the rhythm of the music, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

  Dynamic display execution comprising: determination means for determining when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information based on a determination result by the determination means Operating means that can be operated by a player in a gaming machine that gives a predetermined gaming value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, and An operation detecting means for detecting that the operating means has been operated, an output means for outputting music at least during a game by the player, and determining the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means And a setting means for setting a sound generation of a notification sound for notifying that the operation has been performed based on the detection of the operation of the operation means by the operation detection means. When the gaming machine F1, characterized in that it comprises the notification sound that has been set by the setting means, and a sound generating means for sound in accordance with the timing of beat the music that has been determined by the determining means.

  According to the gaming machine F1, determination is performed by the determination means triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and based on the determination result, dynamic display of identification information on the display means is executed by the dynamic display execution means. The When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player, thereby giving the player interest. An operation means that can be operated by the player is provided, and when the operation means is operated, the operation is detected by the operation detection means. On the other hand, music is output by the output means at least during a period in which a game is being played by the player. The timing of the beat of the music output by this output means is determined by the determination means. Here, based on the detection of the operation of the operation means by the operation detection means, the sounding of the notification sound for notifying that the operation has been performed is set by the setting means. Then, the set notification sound is generated by the sound generation means in accordance with the timing of the music beat determined by the determination means. That is, when the player operates the operation means, the notification sound is generated in accordance with the timing of the music beat. Thus, the player can enhance the fun of the game by listening to the notification sound while riding on the rhythm of the music. Further, in order to listen to the notification sound riding on the rhythm of music, the operation means can be enjoyed and the operation means can be actively operated. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest for the game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine F1, in addition to the timing of the music beat output by the output means, the determination means also determines the timing of the equally divided positions when the beat is divided into a plurality of equal parts, The sound generation means is the notification sound in which the sound generation is set by the setting means, and when the number of unsound notification sound is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, A gaming machine F2, wherein the notification sound is generated also using timing.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are produced. That is, in addition to the beat timing of the music output by the output means, the timing of the equally divided positions when the beats are equally divided is determined by the determination means. Further, when the notification sound is set to be sounded by the setting means and the number of unsounded notification sounds is a predetermined number or more, the timing of the equally divided position determined by the determination means is also used. The notification sound is generated by the sound generation means. Thus, when the player operates the operation means a plurality of times at short intervals, not only the timing of the music beat but also the timing of the equally divided position when the beat is divided into sub-numbers However, since the notification sound is pronounced, a more complicated rhythm can be carved by the notification sound. Therefore, for the music output from the output means, the notification sound engraves a complicated rhythm, so that the player can enjoy the rhythm and actively listen to the notification sound by the complicated rhythm. The operation means can be operated by the player.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the sound generating means specifies a chord of the music at the timing of the sound generation, and the sound of the notification sound to be sounded based on the code specified by the code specifying means A gaming machine F3 comprising a pitch determining means for determining a pitch.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are produced. In other words, the chord of the music at the timing when the notification sound is generated is specified by the code specifying means, and the pitch of the notification sound to be generated is determined by the pitch determining means based on the specified code. As a result, the notification sound is not only pronounced according to the rhythm of the music, but is also pronounced at a pitch that matches the chord progression of the music. Therefore, a melody that matches the music is played by the notification sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest for the game can be enhanced. Moreover, in order to listen to the melody, there is an effect that the player can actively operate the operation means.

  Dynamic display execution comprising: determination means for determining when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information based on a determination result by the determination means Operating means that can be operated by a player in a gaming machine that gives a predetermined gaming value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, and An operation detecting means for detecting that the operating means has been operated, an output means for outputting music at least during a game by the player, and an operation of the operating means detected by the operation detecting means. Sound generation means for generating a notification sound for notifying that there has been an operation, and the sound generation means at the timing of the sound generation. A game machine F4, comprising: a code specifying means for specifying a keyboard; and a pitch determining means for determining the pitch of the notification sound to be generated based on the code specified by the code specifying means. .

  According to the gaming machine F4, determination is performed by the determination means triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and based on the determination result, dynamic display of identification information on the display means is executed by the dynamic display execution means. The When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player, thereby giving the player interest. An operation means that can be operated by the player is provided, and when the operation means is operated, the operation is detected by the operation detection means. On the other hand, music is output by the output means at least during a period in which a game is being played by the player. Then, based on the detection of the operation of the operation means by the operation detection means, a notification sound for notifying that the operation has been performed is generated by the sound generation means. At this time, the chord of the music at the timing when the notification sound is generated is specified by the code specifying means, and the pitch of the notification sound to be generated is determined by the pitch determining means based on the specified code. As a result, the notification sound is not only pronounced according to the rhythm of the music, but is also pronounced at a pitch that matches the chord progression of the music. Therefore, a melody that matches the music is played by the notification sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest for the game can be enhanced. Moreover, in order to listen to the melody, there is an effect that the player can actively operate the operation means.

  In the gaming machine F3 or F4, the pitch determining means determines the pitch of the notification sound to be generated from the constituent sounds constituting the chord specified by the chord specifying means. Machine F5.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3 or F4, the following effects are produced. That is, since the pitch of the notification sound to be generated is determined by the pitch determination means from among the constituent sounds constituting the chord specified by the chord specifying means, the notification sound is simply generated according to the rhythm of the music. In addition to being played, it is pronounced with a pitch that forms a chord and chord of the music. Therefore, a pleasant melody that composes music and chords can be played with the notification sound, and the player can be entertained.

  In any one of the gaming machines F3 to F5, when the chord specified by the chord specifying means is changed to a new chord at the timing, the pitch determining means causes the tone to be generated at that timing. A gaming machine F6, wherein a root sound of the chord is determined as a pitch of the notification sound.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the following effects are produced. That is, when a chord is specified by the chord specifying means, if the specified chord is changed to a new chord at that timing, the pitch of the notification sound to be generated at that timing is set as the pitch of the notification sound. The root sound is determined by the pitch determining means. When a sound having a pitch other than the root sound of the chord is output as a notification sound at the timing of the beat when the music chord is changed, the player recognizes the notification sound as a sound deviating from the chord, and the player May make you feel uncomfortable. This may cause the player to stop operating the operating means. On the other hand, it is possible to make the player listen to the notification sound as a sound that matches the changed code by generating a notification sound with the root sound as the pitch. Therefore, there is an effect that a sound that is comfortable for the player can be heard.

  In any one of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the chord specifying means, together with the chord of the music at the timing of making the sound, the chord of the music at the timing when the notification sound is made before the timing of making the sound And the chord of the music at the timing when the notification sound is generated after the timing of the sound generation, and the pitch determining means is such that each of the chords specified by the chord specifying means is the same code. Yes, if the pitch of the notification sound generated before the sounding timing is the constituent sound of the chord, the elapsed sound of the chord is determined as the pitch of the notification sound sounded at this timing A gaming machine F7 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the following effects are produced. That is, together with the music chord at the timing of sounding this time, the music chord at the timing when the notification sound is pronounced before the timing of sounding and the sound of the notification sound are made after the timing of sounding. The chord of the music at the timing is determined by the chord specifying means. If the specified chords are all the same chord and the pitch of the notification sound generated before the sounding timing is the component sound of the chord, the notification sound to be sounded at this timing As the pitch, the elapsed sound of the chord is determined by the pitch determining means. This makes it possible to generate a notification sound while inserting a notification sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord along with a notification sound whose pitch is the constituent sound of the chord of the music while matching the rhythm of the music Thus, it is possible to give variations to the melody based on the notification sound accompanied by music. Therefore, the melody based on the notification sound does not become monotonous, and there is an effect that voice output that does not bore the player can be performed.

  In the gaming machine F7, the pitch determining means uses the constituent sound of the chord as the pitch of the notification sound at the timing when the notification sound is generated after the generation timing of the notification sound with the elapsed sound as the pitch. A game machine F8 characterized by determining

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F7, the pitch of the notification sound at the timing at which the notification sound is generated after the generation timing of the notification sound having the elapsed sound as the pitch is configured as a chord. The sound is determined by the pitch determining means. As a result, the notification sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord is generated by being sandwiched between the notification sounds whose pitch is the constituent sound of the chord, so the notification sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord is generated. Even in such a case, there is an effect that the player can listen to the melody played by the notification sound as if it was in the chord of the music without feeling uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine F7 or F8, the pitch determining means is such that each of the chords identified by the chord identifying means is the same chord, and the pitch of the notification sound that is pronounced before the timing of sounding is If it is a constituent sound of a chord, the pitch of the elapsed sound is calculated as the pitch of the notification sound to be generated at this timing based on the chord, the pitch of the constituent sound, and the main tone of the music A gaming machine F9, characterized in that the game machine F9 is calculated.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F7 or F8, the following effects are produced. That is, each chord identified by the chord identifying means, that is, a music chord at the timing of sound generation, a music chord at a timing when the notification sound is pronounced before the sounding timing, and a timing of the sounding In the case where the chord of the music at the timing when the notification sound is generated later is the same chord, and the pitch of the notification sound generated before the sounding timing is the constituent sound of the chord, Based on the chord, the pitch of the constituent sound, and the main tone of the music, the pitch determination means calculates the pitch of the elapsed sound as the pitch of the notification sound to be generated at this timing. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a table for determining the elapsed sound in association with the chord of the music, the pitch of the constituent sound that was pronounced before, and the main tone of the music in order to determine the elapsed sound. The memory area for storing the table becomes unnecessary. Therefore, there is an effect that an increase in the storage capacity of the memory can be suppressed.

  Dynamic display execution comprising: determination means for determining when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information based on a determination result by the determination means A movable accessory that operates based on the progress of a game in a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means And a driving means for driving the movable accessory, an output means for outputting music at least during a game by the player, and in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, And a drive control means for controlling the drive means so that the movable accessory operates.

  According to the gaming machine G1, determination is performed by the determination unit triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and based on the determination result, dynamic display of identification information on the display unit is executed by the dynamic display execution unit. The When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player, thereby giving the player interest. Further, a movable accessory that operates based on the progress of the game is provided, and the movable accessory is driven by the driving means. Here, the music is output by the output means at least during the period in which the game is being played by the player. The drive means is controlled by the drive control means so that the movable accessory operates in accordance with the beat timing of the music output by the output means. As a result, the movable accessory operates in accordance with the rhythm of the music, so that the player can play the game according to the rhythm of the music and can enhance the interest in the game.

  Dynamic display execution comprising: determination means for determining when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information based on a determination result by the determination means When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, in a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to the player, light emission that lights or blinks based on the progress of the game Means, output means for outputting music at least during a game by the player, and the light emitting means is lit or flashed in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. A gaming machine G2 comprising: a light emission control means for controlling.

  According to the gaming machine G2, determination is performed by the determination unit triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and based on the determination result, dynamic display of identification information on the display unit is executed by the dynamic display execution unit. The When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player, thereby giving the player interest. In addition, a light emitting means that is lit or blinks based on the progress of the game is provided. Here, the music is output by the output means at least during the period in which the game is being played by the player. The light emission control means controls the light emission means to light up or blink in accordance with the timing of the music beat output by the output means. As a result, the light emitting means is turned on or flashing in accordance with the rhythm of the music, so that the player can play the game according to the rhythm of the music and can enhance the interest in the game.

  Dynamic display execution comprising: determination means for determining when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information based on a determination result by the determination means A period during which at least a player plays a game in a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means Output means for outputting music, and sound generation means for generating a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event triggered by the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game, the sound generation means, the output means A main tone specifying means for specifying the main tone of the music output by the means, a code specifying means for specifying the chord of the music at the timing of the sound generation, and the code specifying means Ri and code specified, the keynote based on the keynote specified by the specifying means, a game machine H1 to the pitch determining means for determining a tone pitch of the alarm sound to the sound, comprising: a.

  According to the gaming machine H1, determination is performed by the determination unit triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and based on the determination result, dynamic display of identification information on the display unit is executed by the dynamic display execution unit. The When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player, thereby giving the player interest. Also, music is output by the output means at least during a period in which a game is being played by the player. On the other hand, triggered by the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game, a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event is generated by the sound generation means. At this time, the main tone of the music output by the output means is specified by the main tone specifying means, and the chord of music at the timing when the notification sound is generated is specified by the code specifying means. Then, based on the specified chord and the main tone of the music, the pitch of the notification sound to be generated is determined by the pitch determination means. As a result, the notification sound is generated at a pitch that matches the chord progression in accordance with the scale determined by the main tone of the music, so that a melody that matches the music is played by the notification sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest for the game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine H1, the pitch determining means, based on the chord specified by the chord specifying means and the main tone specified by the main tone specifying means, from the relationship between the main tone of the main tone and the chord, A gaming machine H2 that calculates a pitch of a notification sound according to a scale determined by a main tone.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the chord specified by the chord specifying means and the main tone specified by the main tone specifying means, the pitch of the notification sound is determined from the relationship between the main tone and the chord according to the scale determined by the main tone. Calculated by high decision means. The pitch can be determined by the calculation in this way because the scale determined according to the main tone set for music only changes the pitch of the main tone of the main tone. This is because the height relationship) is always constant. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a table for determining the pitch, and a memory area for storing the table becomes unnecessary. Therefore, there is an effect that an increase in the storage capacity of the memory can be suppressed.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B4, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, G1, G2, H1, and H2, the gaming machine is a slot machine, A gaming machine I1. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B4, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, G1, G2, H1, and H2, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine I2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B4, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, G1, G2, H1 and H2, the gaming machine includes a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine I3 characterized by being fused. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
22 Frame button (operation means)
60 gaming board 64 first entrance (detection means)
65a Special prize opening (detection means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
87 1st character (movable character)
87a First accessory vertical movement motor (drive means)
87e First accessory rotating motor (driving means)
110 Main control device (main control means)
111 Dispensing control device (dispensing means)
112a Ball launch unit (launch means)
113 Sound lamp control device (sound control means, drive control means, light emission control means)
114 Display control device (dynamic display execution means, display control means)
227 Lamp display device (light emitting means)
S1207 Change start processing (determination means)
S1907 (setting means, operation detection means)
S2010 (setting means)
S2121 (determination means)
S2129 (setting means)
S2131 (pronunciation means)
S2135 Start winning sound output processing (sound generation means)
S2137 Frame button operation sound output processing (sound generation means)
S2144 (Output means)
S2145 (Acquisition means)
S2161, S2171, S2177 (code specifying means)
S2159, S2161, S2164 (pitch determination means)
S2174, S2177 (pitch determination means)
S3611 (output start determination means)
S3612 (transmission means)
S3613 (Acquisition means)
S3616 (notification means)
S3807 (output means)
S4001 (Judgment means)
S4203 (Acquisition means)
S4206 (notification means)
S4401, S4402 (pitch determination means)

Claims (2)

Dynamic display execution comprising: determination means for determining when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information based on a determination result by the determination means In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined gaming value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means,
Output means for outputting music at least during a period in which a game is being played by the player;
With the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game as a trigger, the sound generation means for generating a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event,
The pronunciation is
Chord specifying means for specifying the chord of the music at the timing of the sound generation;
A game machine comprising: pitch determining means for determining a pitch of the notification sound to be generated based on the code specified by the code specifying means.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the pitch determining means determines a pitch of the notification sound to be generated from among constituent sounds constituting the chord specified by the chord specifying means.

Images